JP2020192413A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can satisfactorily increase a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine, first special information is acquired when a game ball enters a first start port 56, and second special information is acquired when a game ball enters second start ports 57, 58. When it is determined that the first special information or the second special information is a result of imparting correspondence, a privilege game is started after it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied. At this time, a predetermined condition and a second acquisition condition are set so that the second special information is stored in acquisition information storage means by the end of the privilege game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to shift to a privileged gaming state such as a winning gaming state when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery will be held. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.

Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the player's interest in the game by increasing the value when the game shifts to the privilege game state.

In view of the above points, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily increasing a player's interest in a game.

The invention according to claim 1 for achieving the above object acquires the first special information based on the establishment of the predetermined first acquisition condition, and is different from the first acquisition condition. The information acquisition means for acquiring the second special information based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition, the first special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the second special information are each set to an integer value larger than 1. The grant determination of whether or not the acquired information storage means that stores up to a specified number, the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second special information correspond to the validity information group in the grant information. Is executed, and the grant determination means for sequentially executing the grant determination for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means are the first special information to be determined or the first. 2 It is assumed that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group. When the result of the grant correspondence is obtained, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege game to the player is provided, and the grant determination means includes the first special information and the acquisition information storage means. When the second special information is stored together, the second special information grant determination is executed before the first special information grant determination, and the grant determination means is provided with the second special information. In the case of a result, in a gaming machine in which it is easier for the player to select a privilege game that is advantageous to the player than in the case where the first special information is the result of granting, the privilege game is a start condition predetermined by the privilege granting means. Is started when it is determined that the above is established, and the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privilege game.

According to this, when the privilege game is given, the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privilege game. Therefore, as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is executed. Therefore, in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the second special information that is likely to grant the privilege game advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result is obtained (winning the winning lottery) is always determined. By increasing the value of the privileged game, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry section". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electric composition in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a main control device. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a voice lamp control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st hold area. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol winning / failing table storage area, (a) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a low probability mode, and (b) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a high probability mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the distribution table storage area, (a) shows the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the 1st result display part, and (b) is for the 2nd result display part. The distribution table (second distribution information group) is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information executed in the main MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure special electric address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure change executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a round executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a special electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during closing of a special electric power | execution which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power termination processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power control processing which is executed in the main MPU. Fuzu This is a diagram for explaining the Fuden address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main command correspondence processing following FIG. 34. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a figure which shows the opening image displayed on the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the other correspondence processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the passive distribution unit in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution operation of the game ball of the passive distribution unit in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the main control device in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the opening image which is displayed on the symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the arrangement relation of the 2nd start port, the discharge passage, and the 2nd variable winning apparatus start gate in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship of the display mode of the special symbol in 4th Embodiment of this invention, the open lottery mode of an electric accessory, the validity period of the variable winning device start gate, and the game ball. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the main control device in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending information executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the grasp process of the fluctuation display time executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special opening image which is displayed on the symbol display device in 5th Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In each of the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equal to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First Embodiment)
An example of applying the first embodiment of the present invention to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which the main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front of the eleven. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment in the game hall.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. It has 15 doors. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (open / close) with respect to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (other with respect to the rotation center) in front view. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so that it can rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. There is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 is locked so that the game machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the rotation tip side thereof, and the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of putting 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 having a substantially rectangular opening in a substantially central portion. Has been done. A window panel 22 having two colorless and transparent flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front door frame 14, and the front surface (game area) of the game board 43, which will be described later, is the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side of. The window panel 22 may be made of a synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, instead of the flat glass.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 protruding in front of the front door frame 14 below the window portion 21. Are lined up and down. Then, as shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23, and the game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface of the opening is inclined downward toward the right side when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is charged (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to the game ball launching mechanism (launching means) 44 described later.

Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operating means) at a substantially central portion of the upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened), and is in front of the first frame button 26. A second frame button 27 (operating means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated in the symbol display device 80, which will be described later, when the stage (background) to be displayed is changed, the chance-up effect of the reach effect to be displayed, or the effect of the notice character is displayed. To. The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, the amount of light, or the like controlled by the voice lamp control device 92 described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape in the top view, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape in the top view. However, the shapes of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 Can be changed as appropriate.

The stage is a production (background) mode in which the production displayed on the symbol display device 80 is unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the "underwater stage", "beach stage", and "city stage" are used. There are three stages. Then, various productions such as reach production, which will be described later, are set so as to be productions according to the theme corresponding to each stage. Further, the stage can be changed by the player operating the first frame button 26 during a period in which the variable display is not performed and a predetermined period in which the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) described later. This is performed, and each time the first frame button 26 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side of the front view from the second frame button 27. As a result, when the ball lending button 28 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 28 is operated in response to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. As a result, it is possible to standardize a pachinko machine (CR machine) using a card unit and a cash machine.

Inside the lower bulging portion 24, a lower plate 30 is provided which opens upward like the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 provided in the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 operated by the player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 43, which will be described later, is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 30 when viewed from the front. .. Inside the operation handle 31, a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is being touched by the player, and a game ball even in a situation where the player is rotating the operation handle 31. It has a built-in push-button type stop switch 31b for stopping firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electrical resistance. Then, when the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 31 The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the above, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43 described later with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball pulling lever 32 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 30 when discharging the ball stored in the lower plate 30 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower plate 30. The ball pulling lever 32 is normally arranged in the right direction, and by sliding it to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. It is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 32 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

Further, the front door frame 14 is provided with an illumination unit 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED around the window unit 21, and a pair of speaker units 34 are provided at both left and right ends above the window unit 21. It is equipped. In the pachinko machine 10, each illumination unit 33 lights up or blinks at the time of hitting or reaching, to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. By notifying that the player is hitting or reaching, the effect of the effect during the game is enhanced. In addition, the illumination unit 33 also functions as an error lamp that blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 35 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated in the area around the illumination portion 33, is attached.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the central portion of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. The resin base 41 is detachably attached to the game board 43 shown in FIG. 5, and is provided with a game ball launching mechanism 44 for firing the game ball into the front region of the game board 43. The game ball launch mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and the launch rail 45 extending toward the induction rail described later and the game ball stored in the upper plate 25 are placed on the launch rail 45. The ball feeding device 46 is provided with a ball feeding device 46, and a firing solenoid 47, which is an electric actuator that launches a game ball supplied on the launch rail 45 toward the induction rail. Then, by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled, and the game ball is launched.

Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails 51 for ball guidance, a windmill 52, an inner rail 53, an outer rail 54, and a general winning opening on the front surface of a base plate 50 made of a resin material cut into a substantially rectangular shape in the front view. 55, 1st starting port (1st starting ball entry section) 56, 2 2nd starting holes (2nd starting ball entry section) 57, 58, variable winning device (variable winning means) 59, normal symbol starting gate 60, The variable winning device start gate (special game start ball entry section) 61, the variable display device unit 62, and the like are assembled and configured. The general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the second starting opening 57, 58, the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, the variable winning device starting gate 61, the variable display device unit 62, etc. are processed by router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 50, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 43 by a wood screw or the like. In the present embodiment, two second starting ports 57 and 58 are assembled to the game board 43, and when the second starting port 57 and the second starting port 58 are clearly distinguished, the second starting port 57 is used. A second starting port 57 is usually used, and the second starting port 58 is referred to as a special second starting port 58. The peripheral portion of such a game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the central portion of the front surface can be visually recognized via the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14. There is.

Further, the game board 43 has a general winning opening 55, a first starting opening 56, a normal second starting opening 57, a special second starting opening 58, a variable winning device 59, a normal symbol starting gate 60, and a variable winning device starting gate 61. Detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a (see FIG. 9) are provided corresponding to each of the above. Then, a ball enters the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, and the variable winning device starting gate 61. Then, the ball entering is detected by the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. As the detection sensor, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as it can individually detect the entry of a game ball.

Further, when the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, and the variable winning device 59 is detected, based on the detection result. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 55, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 59, 15 game balls are paid out. When the payout is executed and the ball enters the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the payout of three game balls is executed. There is. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls for entering the first starting port 56 is larger than the number of prize balls for entering the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. May be increased. Further, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 59 is not limited to a configuration larger than the number of other prize balls. For example, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 59 is the general winning opening 55. The number of prize balls may be less than the number of prize balls for entering the ball.

The inner rail 53 and the outer rail 54 are formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and the inner rail 53 and the outer rail 54 form a guide rail and a game ball launching mechanism. The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, a resin connecting member 63 that connects the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 53 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 54 is arranged in front view. There is. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 53, the outer rail 54, and the connecting member 63, and is an area in which the game is played according to the behavior of the game ball (launched game ball). The area where is flowing down).

A return ball prevention member 64 is attached to the tip side of the inner rail 53 (upper left portion in FIG. 5), and the game ball once launched to the upper part (game area) of the game board 43 is guided by the guide rail (inner rail 53). It is possible to suppress the return to the inside (the area between the outer rail 54 and the outer rail 54). A return rubber 65 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 54 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 65. , The momentum is being dampened and bounced back toward the center.

The first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, and the special second starting port 58 allow a game ball to enter, and the first starting port 56 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 43 in the front view. Normally, the second starting port 57 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 43 in front view (right side of the first starting port 56), and the special second starting port 58 is arranged on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43. Has been done. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 56, the corresponding detection sensor 56a (see FIG. 9) detects the entry of the game ball. Similarly, when a game ball normally enters the second starting port 57, the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 9) detects the entry of the game ball, and when the game ball enters the special second starting port 58. , The corresponding detection sensor 58a (see FIG. 9) detects the entry of the game ball. Then, each detection result is output to the main control device 91, which will be described later, and the main control device 91 determines whether or not the special symbol hits (determines whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode). The display according to the lottery result is shown on the symbol display device 80 described later.

Further, normally, the second starting port 57 is provided with an electric accessory 66. The electric accessory 66 is configured to be openable and closable, and when the electric accessory 66 is in the closed state, the game ball normally does not enter the second starting port 57 or is difficult to enter. When the electric accessory 66 is in the open state, the game ball is usually in a state in which it is easy to enter the second starting port 57.

The normal symbol start gate (through gate) 60 is provided on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43 and below the special second start port 58. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60, the passage (entry ball) of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 60a (see FIG. 9), and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. Will be done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60, the main control device 91, which will be described later, determines whether or not the normal symbol hits (determines whether or not the electric accessory 66 is opened). Then, when the determination result is a hit (winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory drive unit 66a (see FIG. 9) is driven to open the electric accessory 66. Therefore, the game ball is usually in a state where it is easy to enter the second starting port 57.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 66 is more likely to be in the open state due to an increase in the probability of hitting the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 66 than the high frequency support mode. Is equipped with a low-frequency support mode that is unlikely to be open. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 60 to open the electric accessory 66, so that the game ball is viewed from the front of the symbol display device 80. Fire the game ball so that it passes on the right side (so-called right-handed).

The variable winning device 59 is arranged on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 43, and has a large winning opening 59a leading to the back side of the game board 43, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 59b covering the large winning opening 59a, and the like. It is configured to have a variable winning drive unit 59d (see FIG. 9) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 59b forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate 59b. The large winning opening 59a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Then, when it is determined that the main control device 91, which will be described later, has won the transition to the open / close execution mode (wins the winning lottery), it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61. Then, the variable winning drive unit 59d is driven and the opening / closing plate 59b is tilted downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening 59a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state. For example, the normally closed large winning opening 59a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls are inserted). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 59 is determined by the determined hit type, and for example, in the case of the 16R hit result described later, the opening / closing operation is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is given to the player as a game value (game value). The payout will be made. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 and enters the grand prize opening 59a (so-called right-handed strike). ). The opening / closing execution mode is a lottery game (first lottery game) triggered by a prize in the first starting port 56 in the main control device 91, which will be described later, or a winning in the normal second starting port 57. It is a mode that shifts when the lottery is won to determine whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode of the lottery game to be performed and the lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by winning the special second starting port 58. This open / close execution mode will be described later.

The variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43 and directly above the special second start port 58. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always enters the special second starting port 58. .. Then, when the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61, the passage (entry) of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 61a (see FIG. 9), and the detection result is for the main control device 91 described later. It is output. When the main control device 91 determines that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been won (the winning lottery has been won), and determines that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61, as described above. Drives the variable winning drive unit 59d. When the main control device 91 determines that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been won, the main control device 91 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61, but the variable winning device starting gate 61 is used for the game. The determination of whether or not the ball has passed is executed after the fixed time described later has elapsed. In other words, it can be said that the variable winning device start gate 61 becomes effective after the main control device 91 determines that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been won, and after the fixed time has elapsed.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the main control device 91 has won the transition to the open / close execution mode (winning the winning lottery), the open / close execution mode starts immediately (automatically) after the fixed time has elapsed. After determining that the main control device 91 has won the transition to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 91 sets the variable winning device start gate 61 to the game ball after a fixed time has elapsed. The open / close execution mode is started when it is determined that has passed.

Further, as described above, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always enters the special second starting port 58. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed (when the opening / closing execution mode is started), a lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by a game ball entering the special second starting port 58 is always performed. It will be in a pending state.

The special second starting port 58 is arranged so that only the game balls that have passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 can enter. That is, the special second starting port 58 is arranged so that a game ball that has not passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 does not enter.

Further, as described above, the nail 51, the windmill 52, and the like are arranged on the game board 43, and the nail 51, the windmill 52, and the like are launched by the player toward the first starting port 56. The probability that the game ball launched by the player toward the special second starting port 58 will enter the special second starting port 58 is lower than the probability that the ball will enter the first starting port 56. In addition, the path through which the game ball flows down to the first starting port 56 and the path through which the game ball flows down to the special second starting port 58 are appropriately provided.
Although not particularly limited, in the nail 51, the windmill 52, etc., the game ball launched by the player toward the first start port 56 enters at about 1/15, and the player makes a special second start. It is arranged on the game board 43 so that the game ball fired toward the mouth 58 enters at about 1/30. That is, when the player is not in the high-frequency support mode, the player who fires the game ball toward the first start port 56 executes opening and closing more than when the game ball is fired toward the special second start port 58. You can get a lot of chances to win a lottery to decide whether to switch to the mode.

A plurality of general winning openings 55 are provided below the front view of the game board 43. In addition, an out port 67 is provided at the lowermost part of the front view of the game board 43, so that game balls that have not entered the various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 67. ..

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not. In this specification, the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, and the variable winning device 59 (large winning opening 59a). The ball (the game ball is detected by the detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c) is also expressed as a prize.

A sticking space 70 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space 70 is a front door frame. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of 14.

Further, a main display unit 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided in the lower left corner portion (outside of the outer rail 54) of the game board 43 in front view. The main display unit 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window unit 21 of the front door frame 14.

The main display unit 71 is a first result display unit 71a showing the result of the first lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning of the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, and the special second. The second result display unit 71b showing the result of the second lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning of the starting port 58 wins a lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode. As a result, when the variable winning device 59 is in the open / close execution mode (or in the open / close execution mode), it has a round display unit 71c indicating the number of times the variable winning device 59 in the open / close execution mode is opened. There is.

Specifically, the first result display unit 71a performs a variable display regarding the first lottery game, and the variable display (blinks) until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game elapses. After the display), as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the first lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 71a and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the second result display unit 71b, the variation display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variation display (blinking display) is performed until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. After that, as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the second lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 71b and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the corresponding first and second results are based on the first and second lottery games (winning of any of the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58). The variation display is started on the display units 71a and 71b, and the period until the predetermined stop result is displayed and the variation display is stopped corresponds to one game (variation display). However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed in, the variation display is started in the single result display unit, and the period until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is regarded as one game. To do.

Further, the main display unit 71 has other display units 71d in addition to the first and second result display units 71a and 71b and the round display unit 71c. In the other display unit 71d, for example, a variable display is performed triggered by a prize in the normal symbol start gate 60, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the prize in the normal symbol start gate 60 is performed. The results are shown. Then, if the result of the internal lottery triggered by the winning of the normal symbol start gate 60 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state, the other display unit 71d displays a predetermined stop result. After the lighting is displayed, the state shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 66 is in the open state, and the game ball is usually in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 57.

Further, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60 while the other display unit 71d is performing the variable display triggered by winning the normal symbol start gate 60, the maximum number of passages is 4 in this embodiment. It is held up to the number of times, and the number of holds is also displayed. Further, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58 while the variable display is being performed on the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b. Then, in the present embodiment, the number of winnings is held up to 4 times for the first starting port 56 and up to 4 times for the second starting ports 57 and 58, and the number of holdings is also displayed.

The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the number of LEDs is small depending on the combination of the emission colors. It is possible to suggest various game states of. Further, the main display unit 71 may be configured by using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The variable display device unit 62 is arranged in the center of the game board 43. The variable display device unit 62 changes and displays the first special symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first result display unit 71a to display the lottery result of the first lottery game, and also changes on the second result display unit 71b. A symbol display device 80 having a display screen 80a for displaying the lottery result of the second lottery game by varyingly displaying the second special symbol while synchronizing with the display, and a center frame 81 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 80. have.

The center frame 81 is installed with its upper portion extending in front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .. Further, since the symbol display device 80 is arranged in the center of the game board 43 and the center frame 81 is installed in a state of extending forward, the game ball fired by the player is the symbol display device 80. It passes through the left side of the front view or the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 and flows down. In the following, among the regions where the game ball flows down, the region on the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 will be referred to as the first region RS, and the region on the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 will be referred to as the second region RT. It can be said that the special second starting port 58 and the variable winning device starting gate 61 are arranged in the second region RT. Further, in the following, launching the game ball so as to flow down the first region RS is also referred to as left-handed, and launching the game ball so as to flow down the second region RT is also referred to as right-handed.

The design display device 80 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display having a substantially rectangular shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by the winning of the first starting port 56, and the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 The upper display area Dm on the upper side that displays the second special symbol showing the judgment result of the second lottery game triggered by winning a prize, and the lower side that displays the reserved symbols (holding of the first lottery game and the second lottery game). It has a lower display area Dn on the side.

In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by the display control device 93 described later. Further, the symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT.

In the pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is arranged so that the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variablely displayed. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started when a prize is won in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58. That is, when the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b performs the variable display, the symbol display device 80 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 80 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on the preset effective line.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine types of main symbols with the numbers "1" to "9" shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (i), respectively. And, it is composed of a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture shown in FIG. 7 (j). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of nine types of character symbols such as an octopus to which numbers "1" to "9" are added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row are set in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is the main. The symbols and sub-symbols are arranged in a cyclic manner in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and between each main symbol. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are each composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and then the main symbol of "9" is arranged. The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged between the main symbol of "1" and the main symbol of "1", and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, in the upper display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

Then, when an effect for game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm triggered by winning a prize in the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the effect is performed. The variable display is started so that the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the production for the game round ends, if the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines, and the open / close execution mode is formed. The hit video is displayed as a transition to (occurrence of hit result).

As described above, the symbol display device 80 (first result display unit 71a or) is triggered by winning any of the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58. The second result display unit 71b) starts the variation display, displays a predetermined stop result, and stops the variation display, which corresponds to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 7, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

The lower display area Dn is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. The lower display area Dn has a first reserved symbol display area Ds on the left side of the front view and a second reserved symbol display area Dt on the right side of the front view, and has a first reserved symbol display area Ds and a second reserved symbol. It has an execution pending symbol display area Du between it and the display area Dt. The first reserved symbol display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 56, and in this pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the first starting port 56 is held up to four times. Since it is configured as such, it is equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of four small areas. The second hold symbol display area Dt is an area for displaying the number of holds triggered by winning a prize in the normal second start port 57 or the special second start port 58, and in the pachinko machine 10, the normal second start port 57 is normally displayed. Or, because the special second starting port 58 is held up to four times (normally, the second starting port 57 and the special second starting port 58 are held up to four times in total). The four small areas are equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4. The execution pending symbol display area Du is an area for displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the game times variablely displayed on the symbol display device 80.

Then, in the upper display area Dm, when the game ball wins the first starting port 56 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the first lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower In the first reserved symbol display area Ds of the side display area Dn, the display area (center side display area) having the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in which the reserved symbols are not displayed is the first. 1 The reserved symbol of the lottery game is displayed. Similarly, if a game ball wins in the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the second lottery game triggered by the winning is started. In the second reserved symbol display area Dt of the lower display area Dn, which is reserved and the reserved symbol is not displayed, the display area having the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 (the display area on the center side). ), The reserved symbol of the second lottery game is displayed.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), a main control device 91 that controls the main control of the game and a voice lamp control device that controls the voice, the lamp display, and the like. The 92 and the display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box has a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base, and these box bases and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box joint as a (bonding means). Since the substrate boxes are inseparably connected by these box joints, the substrate box needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box is opened. In addition, for example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box can be formed by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the cover. The joining process by the box joining part prevents illegal opening after the joining, and even if illegal opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily, and once. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. Then, when the board box is opened when a defect occurs in the housed control board or when the control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box connecting portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion or the like. , Cut the connecting part between the box joint and the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box and the box cover are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw may be inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion. If the history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it is possible to easily find out whether or not the board box has been opened illegally by looking at the board box.

Further, a plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting bases of the respective control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are provided by the coupling pieces and the coupling pieces. The combination process is performed with and.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 8, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 91, the display control device 93, and the voice lamp control device 92. There is. The back pack unit 15 includes a transparent back pack 94, and a payout mechanism portion 95 and a control device collecting unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

The payout mechanism unit 95 includes a tank 97 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 connected below the tank 97 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail. A payout device 99 is provided at the most downstream portion of the 98 and pays out balls according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 9). Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 99 is discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. A vibrator (not shown) for adding vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98.
Further, the payout mechanism unit 95 is equipped with, for example, a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control device collective unit 96 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99 and various control devices, and the player. It is provided with a power supply and a launch control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the operation handle 31 by the user. The payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 8, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and emission control device 101 are provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. There is. The state return switch 102 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 9). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The payout control device 100, the power supply, and the launch control device 101 are configured by accommodating a control board or the like in a board box in the same manner as the above-mentioned control devices, and are provided with the same fraud deterrent means as described above. .. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at an upper corner portion on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal plate 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the tank 97 or the like runs out of game balls, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for signal output each time the door frame 14 is rented, output terminal for signal output when the game machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened, and state transition such as opening / closing execution mode At that time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal or the like for outputting a signal is provided. Then, a signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine. In addition, each control device (each control board) has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and a random number generator used in various lottery, which will be described later. A device, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 9 to 11 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 9 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 10 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91, and FIG. 11 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91. The configuration of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 is shown. In FIG. 11, the supply lines of the operating power from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 are indicated by double-line arrows, and the other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid line arrows. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. In the following, the MPU 112, ROM 113, and RAM 114 of the main control device 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

The main ROM 113 is configured to use a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a and the distribution table are stored. Storage area 113b, Reach table storage area 113c, Variable display time table storage area 113d, Stop result table storage area 113e, Normal symbol hit / fail table storage area 113f, Special figure special electric address table storage area 113g, Normal figure general electric address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

The main RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. Then, the main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 is, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electric counter area 114d, a special symbol special electric timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, time saving flag storage area 114g, time saving number counter area 114h, Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i, Fuzu Fuden timer counter area 114j, various hit result flag storage area 114k, other various counter areas 114m, other various flag storage areas It has 114n.

In addition to the above elements, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a one-chip configuration in which the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114 are built-in, and the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. It may be a configured configuration. This also applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown), respectively. An input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the configuration may be such that the input port and the output port can be switched as needed. This also applies to the MPU of each control device described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main MPU 112, and various detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a, 115 and various drive units 59d. , 66a, and the main display unit 71 are connected. First, the connection configurations with the various detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a, 115, the various drive units 59d, 66a, and the main display unit 71 will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

On the input side of the main MPU 112, there are a general winning opening 55, a first starting opening 56, a normal second starting opening 57, a special second starting opening 58, a variable winning device 59, and a normal symbol starting gate 60, which are variable. The winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a provided for the winning device start gate 61 (hereinafter, these are collectively won detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, (Also referred to as 60a and 61a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a may be connected to each other via one electrical wiring, and may be connected in the middle of each signal path. The configuration may include a relay board. This also applies to the configuration related to the connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, and 61a through the winning IC 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and each winning unit is based on the reception result. Winning judgment (ball winning judgment) is performed. Further, in the main MPU 112, a first lottery game triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 56 and a second lottery game triggered by winning a prize in the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 are performed. At the same time, the electric accessory opening lottery (support lottery) is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol start gate 60.

The winning IC 116 is a route abnormality confirmation means or a route abnormality confirmation circuit, and is used by the winning IC 116 between the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a and the main MPU 112. Check if the signal is being transmitted normally.

Further, on the input side of the main MPU 112, in addition to the above-mentioned winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor It is electrically connected via electrical wiring. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines the presence or absence of an abnormality targeted for each detection. judge.

On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable winning drive unit 59d for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 59b of the variable winning device 59 and an electric accessory driving unit 66a for opening / closing the electric accessory 66 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. It is connected. Further, the main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the main MPU 112 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 59d and the electric accessory drive unit 66a through the driver circuit, and displays the main display unit 71. Take control.

For example, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 59d is executed on the main MPU 112 so that the large winning opening 59a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 66 is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 66a is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the electric accessory 66 is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display units 71 (first and second result display units 71a, 71b) is executed on the main MPU 112. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 66 is shown, the display control of the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is executed on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 sets information in the main RAM 114 according to the progress of the game. Although omitted in FIG. 9, an external output terminal plate 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 signals according to the information set in the main RAM 114. The output setting is made to the external output terminal plate 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer in the game hall.

Next, the configuration in the connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before explaining the configuration in these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control device 100 will be described.

The payout control device 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 99, the payout control board 121 is equipped with an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 has a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. .. In the following, the MPU 122, ROM 123 and RAM 124 provided in the payout control device 100 will be referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123 and the payout side RAM 124.

The payout side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side MPU 122.

The payout side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 123. Then, the payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123 is executed. In addition to the above elements, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 is blocked from flowing down to the downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sent out to the downstream side. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stop member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting a game ball sent to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring. Has been done. The payout side MPU 122 supplies a drive signal to the payout motor 99a via a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121 to execute the payout of the game ball, and pays out based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Grasp the number of game balls that have been released.

Further, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 provided on the back pack unit 15 via electrical wiring, and the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 is electrically connected via electrical wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. As a result, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by appropriately manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10. The payout side MPU 122 executes the ball lending control by transmitting and receiving an electric signal to and from the card unit.

Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, a fullness detection sensor (not shown) that detects whether the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball tray is electrically connected to the payout side MPU 122. In addition, a ballless detection sensor (not shown) or the like that detects whether the tank 97 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

Then, the payout side MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on the communication with the main side MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

For details on the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms that the prize ball has been won in the prize unit corresponding to the generation of the prize ball based on the detection results of the prize detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, the payout side MPU 122 is notified. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted to the player, and a first signal path SL1 is provided to transmit the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

There are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 55 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 59 is specified, 15 are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning of the first and second starting ports 56, 57, 58 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is issued. It is output.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication in communicating the prize ball command. That is, the information of the plurality of bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

Further, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout status commands include a prize ball completion command indicating that the prize ball has been completed and the number of completed prize balls, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in paying out the game ball, and the predetermined value. It contains an abnormal termination command that indicates that the error has been cleared. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of its own command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as a plurality of bits of information. The predetermined abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a ball-less state of the tank 97.

In communicating the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, the configuration is such that the information of the plurality of bits included in the payout status command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112 in order for the main side MPU 112 to grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

The payout permission signal consists of 1-bit information. When the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, the LOW level signal is transmitted, and when the output of the prize ball command is permitted, the HI level signal is transmitted. To. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and the LOW level signal is output when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. It may be configured to be.

The third signal path SL3 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

In this way, the command communication between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is serial communication instead of parallel communication, so that the electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 can be used. On the other hand, even if a fraudulent act using a so-called hanging board for connecting an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden by electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted as the target of the above action. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned illegal boards are used. It is easy to hide due to electrical wiring. On the other hand, since the command communication is performed by serial communication, it becomes difficult for the illegal board to be hidden in the electrical wiring, and it becomes easy to find the board if it is temporarily installed.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

The power supply and launch control device 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100. A power supply circuit 142 having the power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power supply unit 143 for power-on and a power supply unit 144 for power failure.

The power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, or the like is based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. The required operating voltage is generated for each, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As an outline, the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply takes in the AC 24 volt power supply supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15, and has a + 12 V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, and the like. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the main control device 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 at an intermediate position of the power supply path between the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on and the main MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply. Then, when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power failure signal) to the main MPU 112 is assumed to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has occurred. ..
The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply unit 144 for power failure is composed of a capacitor, and when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. It will be charged. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply unit 144 is discharged from the power supply unit 144. As a result, storage retention power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and retained without being erased while the storage and holding power is being supplied from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure.

The capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). ..
Further, the configuration of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 144 for power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Further, although the description by illustration is omitted, the power supply and the emission control board 141 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 144 for power failure. In the power supply and emission control board 141, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, it is controlled for a sufficient time for executing the power failure processing by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the system, at a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

Here, a configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 will be described.

The electric power from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is supplied to the VCS terminal of the main MPU 112 and the VCS terminal of the payout side MPU 122. In a situation where power is supplied from a commercial power source by the power supplied to the VCS terminal, various control processes are executed by the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held by the RAMs 114 and 124. Will be.

On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112, but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout side MPU 122. That is, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but not to the payout side RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores and holds the information, but the payout side RAM 124 does not store and hold the information. The VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or is not connected to any electrical wiring.

As described above, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but the capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is reduced by configuring the configuration so that it is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124. Is planned. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 that controls the launch of the game ball. The launch control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the conditions, a launch permission receiving circuit 147, and a launch IC 148.

The condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal of a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a that detects that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is touched by the player, and the game even in a situation where the handle portion is rotated. A stop switch 31b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the ball, is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121, and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131.

The transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the condition receives a signal from the touch sensor 31a indicating that the handle portion is being touched by the player, and also receives a signal from the stop switch 31b indicating that the player is not manually operated. Further, when a signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, an HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The firing permission receiving circuit 147 is HI-level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112, provided that the HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to a launch permission) and, when receiving the launch permission signal, continuously supplying a signal corresponding to the signal to the launch IC 148. When the main MPU 112 does not receive the HI level condition satisfying signal from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146, the main side MPU 112 transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to the firing permission), but fires. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main MPU 112 newly starts transmitting the HI level launch permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed, the HI level Ends the transmission of the launch permission signal.

When the launch IC 148 receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is for each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feed device 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis.
In this case, the launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the launch solenoid 47 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch rail 45.

Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the firing IC 148 is based on the voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. Therefore, the larger the operation amount of the operation handle 31, the stronger the firing strength of the game ball by the firing solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

The voice lamp control device 92 includes a voice lamp control board 151, the voice lamp control board 151 is equipped with an MPU 152, and the MPU 152 has a ROM 153 and a RAM 154 built-in. In the following, the MPU 152, ROM 153 and RAM 154 provided in the voice lamp control device 92 will be described as the voice side MPU 152, the voice side ROM 153 and the voice side RAM 154.

The audio side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The audio side ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the audio side MPU 152, and has, for example, various data table storage areas 153a, command information storage area 153b, and the like.

The various data table storage areas 153a are areas in which light emission data, voice data, and the like are stored. The command information storage area 153b is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice side MPU 152 is stored.

The audio side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the audio side ROM 153. Then, the voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The voice side RAM 154 has, for example, a command storage area 154a, a holding data area 154b, various counter areas 154c, and the like.

The command storage area 154a is an area for storing commands received from the main MPU 112. The retained data area 154b is data that is temporarily used to execute the effect and the notification during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the voice side MPU 152 even after the effect and the notification are started. It is an area for storing and holding data for making it available independently. The various counter areas 154c are areas in which game counters and the like are stored.

Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (variation command, type command, fixed stop command, opening command, ending command, hold command, etc., which will be described later), the game times and open / close execution mode Decide the content of the production to be executed in the above. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to control the light emission of the illumination unit 33, and the sound output device 156 is controlled to control the sound of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Do.

A first frame button detection sensor 26a for detecting the operation of the first frame button 26 and a second frame button detection sensor 27a for detecting the operation of the second frame button 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. ing. Then, the voice side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, and when the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, the processing corresponding to the operation is executed. To do.

Further, the voice side MPU 152 identifies whether or not it is necessary to perform notification based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and voice control of the voice output device 156. Notify.

The various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later, but these various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. In addition, various commands are configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information on the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

Further, the audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93, and transmits various commands including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. For various commands output from the voice side MPU 152, the command information storage area 153b of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 91 without going through the voice lamp control device 92, and the voice lamp control device is related to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side in the communication direction from 92.

The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, the display control board 161 has an MPU 162 mounted therein, and the MPU 162 has a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 built therein. Further, the display control board 161 contains a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. In the following, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display side MPU 162.

The program ROM 163 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the display side MPU 162. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when transmitting a command to the VDP 165, each effect. It has a data table storage area 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access as well as being capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. Then, the work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a.

Then, the display side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the voice lamp control device 92, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 165). To carry out.

The VDP165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP165 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc. to intervene in reading and writing the data, and reads the image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores the image data in the video RAM 167 according to the image data. The image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

The character ROM 166 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. Further, as a part of the above data, the character ROM 166 has image data to be displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds, the second reserved symbol display area Dt, and the execution reserved symbol display area Du of the symbol display device 80. The hold image data storage area 166a in which the image data is stored is set.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and share the image data and the like in each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 in the character ROM 166.

The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 167.

Further, the video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a. Then, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the first reserved symbol display area Ds in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RE1 to RE4 are set. Further, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of the second reserved symbol display area Dt in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RF1 to RF4 are set. Further, in the reserved symbol display area 167a, an execution unit area RG is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the execution pending symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80. Then, in each of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du, images corresponding to the data written in the respective unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG in the reserved symbol display area 167a are displayed. To. If no data is set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG (when data meaning a blank is set), the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG are set. In each of the display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du corresponding to the above, no image is displayed, or the background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are exchanged between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 by bidirectional communication. Specifically, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the first signal line group 170, and the first signal line group 170 is used to display from the voice side MPU 152. A command is sent to the side MPU 162. This command transmission is performed by serial communication, and the first signal line group 170 identifies the signal line 171 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 172 for a clock signal for performing the above and a signal line 173 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

Further, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the second signal line group 180, and the display side MPU 162 is connected to the voice side MPU 152 by using the second signal line group 180. The command is sent to. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 180 includes a signal line 181 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 182 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 182 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

The first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one end of the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 is aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector is an audio lamp control device. It is detachably attached to the connector of 92, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 93.

The communication method between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Further, the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like.

The main MPU 112 uses various counter information during a game to draw a lottery for whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a winning lottery), set the display of the main display unit 71, and display the symbol 80. Set the symbol display of. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, a winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery and a winning type counter used for determining the type (winning type) of the opening / closing execution mode when the winning lottery is won. C2, reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 80 deviates and fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of hit random number counter C1, main display unit 71, and symbol display. The fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in the device 80, the electric accessory open random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 66 is in the electric accessory open state, and the electric accessory open random number counter. A random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of C4 is used. A part of each counter is updated at intervals of 4 msec, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 16) described later. The updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. Then, a predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58 is a special symbol in the main RAM 114. A predetermined value stored in the hold ball storage area 114b sequentially and stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60 is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114. Will be done. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114.

Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c will be described.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 114b includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA having the first to fourth holding areas RA1 to RA4 and the first special symbol holding number storage area NA, and the first to fourth holding areas RB1. It has a second special symbol holding ball storage area RB having ~ RB4 and a second special symbol holding number storage area NB, a total holding number storage area NX, and one execution area RC. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of a first holding area RA1 in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA. The configurations of the second to fourth reserved areas RA2 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB, and the execution area RC are , The same as in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4, RB1 to RB4, and the execution area RC include a hit random number counter storage area 201, a hit type counter storage area 202, a reach random number counter storage area 203, and an execution area RC. It has a winning start opening storage area 204. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting port 56. , And each value of the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203, and the first start port. The winning information for 56 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 204. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the first starting port 56, the first reserved area RA1 → the second reserved area RA2 → the third reserved area RA3 → the fourth reserved area RA4, respectively. Numerical information etc. are stored in chronological order. In this way, by providing the four holding areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA, the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 56 is stored up to a maximum of four as a whole. (Hold memory).

Similarly, in the first to fourth holding areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB, the winning history of the game ball to the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 is set to the same. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is placed in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203. At the same time, the winning information for the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 is stored in the winning starting port storage area 204. In the present embodiment, the winning information for the second starting port is stored in the winning starting port storage area 204, but the information for distinguishing the second starting port 57 from the special second starting port 58 is stored. Not done. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the second starting port 57 or the special second starting opening 58, the first holding area RB1 → the second holding area RB2 → the third holding area RB3 → Each numerical information and the like are stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth reserved area RB4. As described above, since the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is provided with the four holding areas RB1 to RB4, the winning history of the game balls to the second starting ports 57 and 58 is a maximum of four as a whole. Is memorized (held memorized).

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, since the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 56 and the second starting ports 57 and 58 is stored up to 4 respectively, up to 8 pieces are stored on hold as a whole. To. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (3 game balls in this embodiment) are not acquired. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the total number of items that can be stored on hold is set to 8, but the total number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to 8, and is arbitrary, such as 4, 6, or. There may be other plurals such as 9 or more. Further, the number that can be stored and stored may be different between the first starting port 56 and the second starting ports 57 and 58.

When the execution area RC starts the variable display of the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b), each value stored in the first reserved area RA1 or the first reserved area RB1. This is an area for moving the player, and at the start of one game round, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RC.

In addition, the first special symbol holding number storage area NA provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is the holding number of the first lottery game (holding the variable display triggered by the winning of the first starting port 56). It is an area to store the number). Similarly, the second special symbol reservation number storage area NB provided in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area RB has the number of reservations for the second lottery game (usually to the second start port 57 or the special second start port 58). This is an area for storing the number of pending changes in the variable display triggered by a prize.
The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the sum number (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c is the value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) according to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 60. This is a hold area for storing in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 12, the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 114c is composed of four storage areas of the first to fourth holding areas RD1 to RD4, an execution area RD5, and a holding number storage area NC. Then, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 60 are stored (reserved storage) by the four storage areas of the first to fourth reserved areas RD1 to RD4.

Specifically, when the normal symbol start gate 60 is continuously won, the electric accessory is opened in the order of the first holding area RD1 → the second holding area RD2 → the third holding area RD3 → the fourth holding area RD4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the normal symbol start gate 60 can be stored.

The execution area RD5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first hold area RD1. Then, when the open lottery of the electric accessory 66 is performed, a winning / failing determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RD5.

Even in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, the number that can be held and stored is not limited to 4, but is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. It may be singular.

Returning to the explanation of the counter, various counters will be described in detail.

The hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Then, especially when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and counting is started again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58, the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 Stored in.

The value of the random number that wins the winning lottery is stored as a special symbol winning / failing table (winning / noting information group in the given information) in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a as the winning / failing information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Here, the contents of the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. 14A and 14B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the special symbol winning / failing table in the present embodiment, FIG. 14A shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 14B shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

As shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol winning / failing table includes the special symbol winning / failing table (low-probability winning / failing information group) for the low-probability mode of FIG. 14 (a) and the high-probability mode of FIG. 14 (b). The special symbol winning / failing table (high-probability winning / failing information group) is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a low probability mode (low probability corresponding state) and a high probability mode (high probability corresponding state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 14A, the value of the random number winning the winning lottery ( That is, the number of winning information) is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 14B, the value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (that is, winning). Information) is said to be 21 pieces. Further, in the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability mode is the winning random number that wins the winning lottery in the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of the counter C1. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 Stored in.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the given information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as the distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 113. 15A and 15B are diagrams for explaining a distribution table, in which FIG. 15A is a distribution table for the first result display unit (first distribution information group), and FIG. 15B is for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (second distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 56. Further, the distribution table for the second result display unit is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second start port 57 or the special second start port 58. It is a table.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), as the distribution destination of the game result, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" Corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, "10 to 23" corresponds to the 4R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 4R normal hit result.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 15B, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0" is used as the distribution destination of the game result. "~ 23" corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R normal hit result.

Here, the probability variation hit result in the present embodiment is a hit result in which the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, the normal winning result is a winning result in which the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode (maintained) and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high frequency support mode in the normal hit result ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (100 times in this embodiment) after the transition, and shifts to the low frequency support mode.

As will be described in detail later, the high frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 66 is easy to open, and the low frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 66 is difficult to open.

Further, in the control of the variable winning device 59 in the open / close execution mode, a round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times. The round game continues until either the predetermined opening duration elapses or the predetermined maximum number of game balls wins the large winning opening 59a. It's a game. For example, the opening duration is set to 30 sec, and the upper limit is set to 10.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. Then, in each round game, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the maximum number of winning balls in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it is expected that a maximum number of prizes will be generated in one round game for the large winning opening 59a.

Here, the various hit results described with reference to FIG. 15 will be described. The "4R probability variation hit result and 4R normal hit result" are game results in which the large winning opening 59a is opened four times, and the "16R probability variation hit result". And 16R normal hit result ”is a game result in which the big winning opening 59a is opened 16 times.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when the winning lottery is won is the case where the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 56 as an opportunity, and the normal first. It is different from the case where the lottery is won by winning a prize in the 2 starting port 57 or the special 2nd starting port 58. Specifically, the probability of winning a 16R probability variation when winning the first starting port 56 is usually a winning 16R probability variation when winning the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. It is lower than the probability. The 16R probability variation hit result can be said to be the most advantageous hit result because the large winning opening 59a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode. That is, the probability that the player can get a large number of balls is higher when the lottery is won by winning the prize in the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. In addition, the case where the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 56 and the case of winning the winning lottery with the winning of the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 are normal. The probabilities of winning results are equal, but the number of rounds for normal winning results is different. Specifically, if the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 56 as an opportunity, the result will be a 4R normal winning result, and the winning of the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 will be the trigger. If you win the lottery, you will get a 16R normal hit result. That is, even if the result is a normal hit, the player will get more balls if the winning lottery is won with the winning of the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. You can get it.

In addition, the "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a subsequent winning lottery is increased as an added value after the end of winning, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution mode). It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to the privilege game). The "low probability mode" refers to a case where the mode is not high probability mode (when the probability change is not in progress), and means a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is lower than in the case of the probability change. ..

Further, as a support mode in the electric accessory 66, the electric accessory 66 is in an open state per unit time when compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. A high frequency support mode (high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency is relatively high and low.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric accessory open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the high-frequency support is provided. The mode has a higher probability of winning the electric accessory open state than the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the electric accessory open state is won, the electric accessory 66 is opened more often in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory release state is won. It is set, and one opening time is set longer. In this case, the electric accessory is opened in the high-frequency support mode, and when the electric accessory 66 is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 66 is opened so that the game ball can easily win the second starting port 57, and the game ball usually wins the second starting port 57. Since the number of game balls is paid out, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much.

The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is set to the electric accessory open state per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, the electric accessory is open. The probability of winning the electric accessory open state in the lottery may be equalized, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be appropriately set, and can be changed as appropriate.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 Stored in. Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game times (the game times in which the winning lottery is won) that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main MPU 112 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and is a stop display result after the variable display in a game in which the variable winning device 59 is in the open / close execution mode. In a game machine in which is a special display result, a variation that tends to be a special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a display state.

Specifically, the reach display is a hit (open / close execution mode) by stopping and displaying some of the symbol strings among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a display state that displays the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may establish the combination of hit symbols corresponding to (shift to), and in that state, displays the fluctuation of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows. is there.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be used, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence. ..

More specifically, with reference to FIG. 6, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the variation display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. In, the main symbol having the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, or the number "3" in the upper symbol row Z1 and the number "1" in the lower symbol row Z3 of the effective line L2 is stopped and displayed. By doing so, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variation display of the symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row) in the middle row, so that the reach display is obtained. Then, when the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The fluctuation display of is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 80a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS has a variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) and a variation display time (display duration) of the symbol in the symbol display device 80. ) Is used to determine in the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 71 and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 80. Then, when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. ..

The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Then, when the electric accessory open random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the count is counted again from the initial value. It will be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60.

The value of the random number that wins the normal symbol is stored as the normal symbol win / loss table (win / fail information group) in the normal symbol win / fail table storage area 113f as the win / loss information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values for winning a normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is "5 to 28". Further, in the high probability mode, it is set to 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the low probability mode, when the value of the acquired electric accessory release random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined to be a winner, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric accessory release random number counter If the value of C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined to be a winner. Then, a predetermined lighting state is indicated on the other display unit 71d of the main display unit 71, and the electric accessory 66 is opened.

<About various processes executed by MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, the main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the power is turned on to the main control device 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait processing, the wait processing (for example, peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) is waited for the sub-side control devices (voice lamp control device 92, display control device 93, payout control device 100, and the like) to become operable. 1 sec) is executed, and the process waits without proceeding to the next process. Then, after the power-on wait processing period has elapsed, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

After that, when it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and firing control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). , It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105: YES), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (S106), and the checksum is used as the power supply. It is determined whether or not the checksum is the same as the checksum saved at the time of blocking, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

Then, when it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), the power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set to the initial value, and the current gaming state (the state before the power-off is normal if the power-off is normal). A command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92 in order to recognize. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that "1" is not set in the power failure flag (S105: NO), or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal. In the case (S107: NO), after clearing the main RAM 114 as the initialization of the main RAM 114 (S108), the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 103. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to the process of S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to the same step 108.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 103 is not pressed, the step 108 is not executed on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Execute 109. That is, if the power off is normal and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the gaming state of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92.

After that, the process proceeds to the following residual processing. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) described later, but a residual time is generated between a certain timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time will fluctuate according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the following residual processing is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following residual processing is irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 114, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process of steps 110 to 113 is executed.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are only set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt enable processing. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing Is always started immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt processing is completed, it is always sufficient to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of the predetermined data in the main MPU 112, the main data stored in the register of the main MPU 112 at that time is stored at the start of the timer interrupt processing. It is not necessary to execute the save process to the side RAM 114, and similarly, it is not necessary to execute the data return process to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing is performed even though these are being updated. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 112 on a regular basis (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further present at an intermediate position of a signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 112 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of this pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer changes from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of is absorbed by the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 first executes the power failure information storage process (S201). In this power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 117, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, a predetermined power failure time process is executed.

Next, the lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main process (FIG. 16) (S203), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main process (FIG. 16) (S203). S204). Next, the game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

Specifically, various sensors (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 9) such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the game machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not the act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by the fraud detection process (S212) described later, and detects the radio wave. It is determined whether or not an illegal radio wave is output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the sensor, and an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. Judge whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made by any of these fraud determinations, it is assumed that a specific event corresponding to the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

After that, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and if it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. Process is executed (S207). In the output processing of the notification command, the notification command is set as the output target when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the execution setting of the notification corresponding to the content of the specific event is performed. In addition, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the corresponding notification are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is supplied. By starting the supply of operating power while manually operating the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and the firing control device 101 after stopping, the main RAM 114 is not executed as the initialization is executed. Become.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output processing, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt processing, the output processing corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the large winning opening 59a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 59d is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output is started. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 66 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 66a is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, the command set as the output target in each process is output to the voice lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

Next, the reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Subsequently, the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, and the variable winning device starting gate 61 are awarded. The signals received from the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a to be detected are read, and the general winning opening 55, the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, and the special second starting port are used. 58, the winning detection process for specifying whether or not the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, and the variable winning device starting gate 61 have won a prize is executed (S210).

After that, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if a fraud determination is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined event has occurred and a positive determination is made, the game is played in step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Make settings for stopping. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 206. As described in step 205, the predetermined event is whether or not the act of bringing the magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and the illegal radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not, whether or not an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined launch cycle, in a situation where the launch operation is continued for the operation handle 31. Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. The input state monitoring process for performing the above is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when the disconnection of each of the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a is confirmed, or when the opening of the game machine main body 12 is confirmed, the above step 207 The process for outputting the notification command is executed in the same manner as in. In the output processing of the notification command, the notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a are disconnected, and the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. Send the following notification command.
Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If a positive judgment is made in these judgments, a notification command corresponding to the judgment is set as an output target.

Next, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times (variable display times) and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 66 is performed. The general electric control process is executed (S216). The special figure special electric control process in step 215 and the normal figure general electric control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

Subsequently, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps 215 and 216, pending information (first, second special) for winning a prize in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58. In order to reflect the increase / decrease number of the symbol hold number storage areas NA and NB) and the increase / decrease number of the hold information (hold number storage area NC) for winning the normal symbol start gate 60 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d). Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed (S217). Further, when shifting to the open / close execution mode, the number of times the variable winning device 59 in the open / close execution mode is opened is reflected in the round display unit 71c based on the round setting process (FIG. 26) described later. Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed. Further, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (turning off) the display of the round display unit 71c is performed.

Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed, a demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 80 for standby display is executed (S218). The demo display process will be described in detail later.

Then, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout side MPU 122 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

Next, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external output terminal plate 104 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. The external information setting process is executed (S221).

After finishing the external processing information setting processing in step 221 or the output processing of the notification command in step 207, the interrupt end declaration setting is executed (S222). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. In step 222, the next Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the execution of timer interrupt processing. Next, the interrupt permission is set (S223). Once the timer interrupt process is started, the main MPU 112 is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step 223, the interrupt enable is set so that the next timer interrupt process can be executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, the special figure special electric control process of step 215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process.

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring hold information is executed when a prize is generated in the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, and the process is executed. When the hold information is stored, a pass / fail judgment is made for the hold information, and further, a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the hold information as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round is executed, and the process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, the pending information acquisition process is executed (S301). Here, the process of acquiring the pending information will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information.

In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58, and the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57 Or, if a game ball wins in the special second starting port 58, the maximum number of holdings (up to 4 in the first starting port 56, usually 4 in the second starting port 57 and the special second starting port 58). This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b up to a maximum of 8 in total. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, the winning / failing judgment result, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is a process to do.

First, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 56 is determined based on the detection information of the winning detection sensor 55a (S401). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 56 (there was a start prize) (S401: YES), the value of the hold number Na stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NA is read out. It is determined whether or not the acquired number of pending Na is less than 4 (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings for the first starting port 56 is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of holdings is stored up to the upper limit).

Then, when it is determined that the acquired number of reservations Na is less than 4 (S402: YES), the number of reservations Na of the first special symbol reservation number storage area NA is added by 1, and the total number of reservations storage area NX is added. The total number of reservations Nx is read, and the total number of reservations Nx is added by 1 (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired number of pending Na is 4 (S402: NO), the acquisition process of the present pending information is terminated as it is.

After completing the process of step 403, each numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the first start. The information that the winning of the mouth 56 is a trigger is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Na added by 1 in step 403 of the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA (S404).

After that, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are made to recognize that the first start port 56 has been won, and the hold command setting process, which is a process for executing the hold notification, is executed (S405). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 56 (S401: NO), the game ball has won the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 (starting prize). Whether or not it is determined based on the detection information of the winning detection sensors 57a and 58a (S406). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has normally won the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 (there was a starting prize) (S406: YES), the same processing as in steps 402 to 405 is performed (S407). ~ S410). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the normal second start port 57 or the special second start port 58 (S406: NO), the acquisition process of the pending information is terminated as it is.

It should be noted that the processes of steps 407 to 410 differ only in the processes for winning a prize in the normal second start port 57 or the special second start port 58 for each process from step 402 to step 405. Although detailed description will be omitted, in step 407, the value of the number of holds Nb stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area NB is read and determined, and in step 408, the value of the second special symbol hold number storage area NB is held. The number Nb is added by 1, and the total number of holdings Nx in the total holding number storage area NX is added by 1. In step 409, the numerical information (special information) of each counter C1 to C3, the normal second start port 57 or the special second start The information that the winning of the mouth 58 is a trigger is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Nb added by 1 in step 408 of the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB.

The above is the process of acquiring the pending information. Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step 301, the special figure special electric counter information is input from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. The read process is executed (S302). Further, the process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S303), and the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. The process is executed (S304).

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes the process related to the effect for the game round and the process related to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (S307), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The figure-changing process (S308) and the special figure-determining process (S309), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the processes related to the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (S310), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the special electric open, which is a process for controlling the open state of the grand prize opening 59a, are being performed. Controls the process (S311), the special electric closing process (S312), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the large winning opening 59a, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the transition of the game state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (S313), which is a process for performing the operation, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

Explaining the special figure special electric address table with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure special electric counter can set numerical information of "0" to "6", and the special figure special electric address table has the special figure special electric counter. Information on the start address (“SA0” to “SA6”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination processing, the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing, and the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric open processing. The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric closing processing, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing. ..

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared (initialized) according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to grasp which process should be executed as the special figure special electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, the effect for game times is started when the effects for other game times are not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the game times In the process related to the effect for the game, before starting the effect for the game, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game is being executed is set, and the open / close execution mode is being executed. It becomes necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the flag is set. In addition, during the execution of the effect for the game round, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is being executed is set, and the flag indicating that the confirmation display is being performed is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not it is.

Further, the open / close execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and the other open / close execution modes are not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the open / close execution mode is related. In the process, before starting the open / close execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is completed is set, and the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it has been set, and if it is being opened, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that it is being opened is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not the flag indicating that the large winning opening 59a is being opened is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not.
Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

On the other hand, if the special figure special electric counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for confirming the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the special figure special electric counter and the special figure special electric address table, the special figure fluctuation start processing (S307), the special figure fluctuation processing (S308), the special figure finalizing processing (S309), and the special electric power start processing (S310). ), The special electric power opening process (S311), the special electric power closing process (S312), and the special electric power ending process (S313) will be described.

First, after acquiring the start address of step 304, the setting process for the zero flag is executed (S305). In the zero flag setting process, the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is read based on the read numerical information. To set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". If it is not "0", "0" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" and the zero flag is "1", the zero flag is changed from "1" to "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the main MPU 112, and is the timer in step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Numerical information is subtracted in the update process.

Subsequently, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 304 is executed (S306). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process (S307), and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process (S308). If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to the special figure confirmation processing (S309), and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to the special electric start processing (S310), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the special electric open processing (S311), if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the special electric closed processing (S312), and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing (S313). Then, when the processes of steps 307 to 313 are executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, each process of steps 307 to 313 will be described individually.

First, the special figure variation start processing in step 307 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation start process. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the hold information is stored, and the process for starting the game round in which the variation display is performed on the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Run.

First, the value of the total number of holds Nx is read from the total number of holds storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired number of holds Nx is 1 or more (S501). Then, when it is determined that the total number of reserved numbers Nx is 0 (S501: NO), the present special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of pending numbers Nx is 1 or more (S501: YES), the data setting process is executed (S502). Here, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the data setting process.

Specifically, in this data setting process, first, the value of the hold number Nb is read from the second special symbol hold number storage area NB, and it is determined whether or not the acquired hold number Nb is 1 or more (S601). .. When it is determined that the hold number Nb is 1 or more (S601: YES), the hold number Nb is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1 (S602). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RB1 in the second special symbol hold ball storage area RB is shifted to the execution area RC (S603). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is shifted (S604). Specifically, the process of step 604 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reserved area RB1. , 2nd hold area RB2 → 1st hold area RB1, 3rd hold area RB3 → 2nd hold area RB2, 4th hold area RB4 → 3rd hold area RB3, and so on.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number Nb is not 1 or more (S601: NO), that is, when only the hold number Na is 1 or more, the hold number Na is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1. S605). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RA1 in the first special symbol hold ball storage area RA is shifted to the execution area RC (S606). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is shifted (S607). Specifically, this process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first reserved area RA1 and the first. 2 Hold area RA2 → 1st hold area RA1, 3rd hold area RA3 → 2nd hold area RA2, 4th hold area RA4 → 3rd hold area RA3, and so on, the data in each area is shifted.

After executing the shift process of step 604 or after executing the shift process of step 607, the data of the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 have been shifted, or the first to fourth reserved areas have been executed. A shift command for causing the voice lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data of RB1 to RB4 has been shifted is set as an output target (S608). The shift command set in step 608 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17).

That is, in the present embodiment, it is more likely that the player wins the lottery when the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 is won (see FIG. 15). If there is hold information related to the second lottery game, priority digestion is performed to preferentially shift the hold information related to the second lottery game to the execution area RC.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21), after executing the data setting process in step 502, the winning / failing determination process (special information determination process), which is a winning lottery, is executed (S503).
In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. judge. Then, when it is determined that the mode is in the high probability mode, the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 14B) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201) is the hit numerical information for the high probability mode. Determine if they match. If it is determined that the mode is in the low probability mode, refer to the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 14 (a)) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201) is the hit numerical information for the low probability mode. Determine if they match. The high-probability mode flag is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the probability variation hit result (FIG. 29, S1303), and then erased at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the normal hit result (FIG. 29, S1303). S1304).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is the winning result (S504). If it is determined that the result is a winning result (S504: YES), the distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S505). In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202) and the winning prize. Grasp the information of the starting port. Then, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 grasped above (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202). Identify which hit result corresponds to. Specifically, in the case where a prize is given to the first starting port 56, the 16R probability variation hit result is obtained by referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit (FIG. 15A). It is specified which of the 4R probability variation hit result and the 16R normal hit result corresponds to. Further, in the case where a prize is normally given to the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58, the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 15B) is referred to. It is specified whether the 16R probability variation hit result or the 16R normal hit result corresponds to the hit result.

After that, the stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (S506). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern (lighting state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation this time is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. It is specified from the stop result table for the hit result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for the hit result, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 is set differently for each type of the hit result.

Next, the flag storage process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S507). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the hit result specified in step 505 in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S504: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (S508). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113 for the deviation result. The stop result table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the winning result.

After executing any of the processes of step 507 and step 508, a process of grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) (display mode determination process) is executed (S509). In this process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the winning results, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, although it is not a hit result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RC (numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence. In that case, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS this time is supported. The variable display time information is acquired, and the type of reach (normal reach or super reach) is determined.

The normal reach in the present embodiment is a reach with a short variation display time, and after a reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the interrupted symbol row Z2 is stopped as it is ( This is the so-called “bite stop) fluctuation (see FIG. 6 for the symbol sequence). The super reach is a reach that has a longer variable display time than the normal reach, and is a reach that suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that a hit result will be generated in the game times. For example, the display is displayed after the normal reach. Will be done. In the present embodiment, when the game times this time is a winning result, the probability of selecting the super reach is higher than when it is not a winning result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time table for non-reach generation, which is stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113, is referred to, and the variation type counter CS of this time is used. Acquires variable display time information corresponding to numerical information.

The variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach is different from the variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach occurrence. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the total number of pending numbers Nx increases. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The time is set.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the total number of holdings Nx and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various hit results, a variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of out-reach and the case of out-of-reach non-occurrence (complete off). In this case, the variable display time is distributed according to each game result.

Next, the information on the fluctuation display time acquired in step 509 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e (S510). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process (S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Further, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 80 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the game round is performed. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line), the confirmation display (final stop display) is performed over the confirmation time (final stop time).
In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 509 is the total time for one game minus the fixed time. In this respect, the variable display time can be rephrased as the time before the confirmation (the time before the final stop).

Subsequently, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets (S511). The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table is the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach generation variation display time table. The variable display time acquired by normal reach is also different from the variable display time acquired by super reach. Therefore, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach, the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, reaches from the information on the fluctuation display time. It is possible to identify the presence or absence of occurrence. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach. Note that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred and information that directly indicates the type of reach.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 16R probability variation hit result, the 4R probability variation hit result, and the 16R normal hit result as the game result information. The variation command and the type command set as output targets in step 511 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Will be done.

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g (S512), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is stored (S512: YES), it is provided in the main RAM 114. The time reduction counter stored in the time reduction counter area 114h is decremented by 1 (S513). The time reduction counter is set to a specified number of times (100 in the present embodiment) after the ending time in the open / close execution mode caused by the 4R normal hit result or the 16R normal hit result has elapsed (FIG. 29, S1305).

After subtracting 1 from the time reduction counter, or when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not stored (S512: NO), the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 is started (S514), and the special figure special electric counter is turned on. 1 is added (S515). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step 515 is executed. ". After that, the special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step 308 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure. The special figure change processing is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the variation display time in the production for this game round has elapsed ( S701). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" and the zero flag is set to "1" is the fluctuation display time in the production for this game round. It means that it has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S701: NO), the main display unit 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so that the update timing of the main display unit 71 (update of the light emission pattern) It is determined whether or not it is (timing) (S702). Then, when it is determined that it is not the update timing (S702: NO), the processing during the change of the special figure is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update timing is reached (S702: YES), the update content reading process is executed (S703). For this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113i of the main ROM 113.

Next, an update process is executed in which the update content read in step 703 is set for the update of the main display unit 71 (S704). The process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 71 is executed by the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S701: YES), the fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as the output target (S705). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the effect for the current game round.

Then, the process of reading the stop result is executed (S706). In the read-out process, at the start of the current game round, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed, which is set in the main RAM 114 in step 506 or step 508 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21), is read out. After that, an update process is executed in which the information on the mode of the read pattern is set for updating the main display unit 71 (S707).

Subsequently, the information of the fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the fixed time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S708). Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S709). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the special figure changing processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the processing of step 709 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

Next, the process during special figure determination in step 309 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the processing during the determination of the special figure. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the production for this game round has elapsed (S801). ). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the fixed time has passed in the production for this game. It means that you did. If it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S801: NO), the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the fixed time has passed (S801: YES), the winning / failing determination that triggered the current game is determined by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result of is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode) (S802). In the various hit result flag storage areas 114k, the flags corresponding to the hit results are stored in the flag storage process of step 307 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21).

If it is determined that the winning is won (S802: YES), the opening command is set as the output target (S803). The opening command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. The processing content of the audio side MPU 152 by receiving the opening command will be described in detail later, but when the audio side MPU 152 receives the opening command, it executes various processes (FIGS. 34, S1712, S1713) and displays side. An opening command is transmitted to the MPU 162 (FIG. 34, S1714). The processing content due to the display side MPU 162 receiving the opening command from the voice side MPU 152 will be described in detail later, but when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command from the voice side MPU 152, the display side MPU 162 sets the opening data table ( FIG. 37, S2006) is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 38, the symbol display device 80 fires a game ball so as to pass through the characters “big hit !!”, a corresponding background image (not shown), and the variable winning device start gate 61 (). An opening image is displayed suggesting that you should hit right. The opening command also includes information on the type of hit result (16R probability variation hit result, 4R probability variation hit result, 16R normal hit result, 4R normal hit result) that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S804). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the process of step 804 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not won (S802: NO), that is, when the result of the winning / failing determination that triggered the game round this time is a wrong result (that is, the result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode). Is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more (S805). Then, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is 0 (S805: NO), the time reduction flag is deleted if the time reduction flag is stored in the time reduction flag storage area 114g (S806). After clearing the time saving flag, or when it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter is 1 or more (S805: YES), the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S807). After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

Next, the special electric start processing of step 310 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special electric power start processing. The special electric power start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "3".

In the special electric start processing, first, whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 is determined based on the detection information of the detection sensor 61a (S901). The situation in which it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 in the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" is the opening image (FIG. 38) on the symbol display device 80. (See) is displayed, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61.
Then, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 (S901: NO), the special electric power start process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 (S901: YES), the number of rounds corresponding to various hit results is applied to the round counters provided in the other various counter areas 114 m of the main RAM 114. The setting process for the round to set is performed (S902). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the main MPU 112, and one round is consumed in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode. "1" is subtracted each time.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the winning result is obtained in step 504 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21), and the confirmation time has elapsed in step 801 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 24). Even if it is determined, the opening / closing execution mode (round game) is not started immediately (automatically), and in order to start the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device start gate 61 is used as a game ball. It is necessary to determine that has passed. Therefore, the player does not need to launch the game ball immediately when the winning result is obtained, and the player can start the opening / closing execution mode at the player's own timing. As described above, this special electric train start process is a process that is executed after the fixed time has elapsed, even if it is a winning result. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 before the fixed time elapses, the open / close execution mode is not started.

Further, as described above, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always wins a prize in the special second starting port 58. Therefore, determining that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 in step 901 means that the game ball always wins the special second starting port 58. That is, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode is always started with the game ball winning in the special second starting port 58. In other words, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode is started in a state in which the second lottery game triggered by the winning of the game ball in the special second starting port 58 is held.

Here, the setting process for the round of step 902 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the round.

First, "10" is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in the winning counters provided in the other various counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114 (S1001). The winning counter is a counter in which "1" is subtracted each time a game ball is won in the large winning opening 59a.

Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the special electric start processing is the 16R probability variation hit result. (S1002). Then, when it is determined that the result is not the 16R probability variation hit result (S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the result is the 16R normal hit result (S1003).

When it is determined that the result is a 16R probability variation hit (S1002: YES), and when it is determined that the result is a 16R normal hit result (S1003: YES), after setting "16" in the round counter (S1004), this End the setting process for the round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not the 16R normal hit result (S1003: NO), the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k indicate the 4R probability variation hit result or the 4R normal hit result. After setting "4" in the round counter (S1005), the setting process for this round ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric power start process (FIG. 25), after the setting process for the round of step 902 is completed, the first large winning opening 59a according to the hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is opened. Read the duration information (S903). In this embodiment, the initial opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S904).

Next, the opening setting process for opening the large winning opening 59a is executed (S905).
In this open setting process, "1" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 59a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 59d is started in order to switch the large winning opening 59a to the open state, and the open / close execution mode is started. Is started.

Subsequently, after setting the release command as the output target (S906), the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (S907). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the special electric start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 907 is executed. Become. After that, the special electric train start process is completed.

Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step 311 in the special power special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the special electric power. The processing during opening of the special electric power is the processing after the special electric power start processing, and the numerical information of the special electric power counter is "4".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening duration in the current round game has elapsed (S1101). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

When it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1101: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1102). Subsequently, the closing time information (for example, 1 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the closing time setting process is performed in which the closing time information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1103). Then, a closing setting process for closing the large winning opening 59a is executed (S1104). In the closing setting process, "0" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 59a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 59d is stopped in order to switch the large winning opening 59a to the closed state.

After that, after setting the close command as the output target (S1105), the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1106). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing during opening of the special electric power is executed is "4", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing of step 1106 is executed is "5". Become. After that, the processing during the opening of this special electric train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening duration has not elapsed (S1101: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the large winning opening 59a based on the detection information from the winning detection sensor 59c (S1107). ). Then, when it is determined that there is no winning in the large winning opening 59a (S1107: NO), the processing during the opening of the special electric train is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize in the large prize opening 59a (S1107: YES), the prize counter is subtracted by 1 (S1108). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is "0" (S1109), and if it is determined to be "0" (S1109: YES), after executing the processes of steps 1102 to 1106, the present Ends processing while the special electric power is open. On the other hand, if the winning counter is not "0" (S1109: NO), the processing during the opening of the special electric power is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing during closing of the special electric power in step 312 in the special drawing special electric power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing during closing of the special electric train. The special electric power closing process is a process after the special electric power opening process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "5".

First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is "0" (S1201). If the round counter is not "0" (S1201: NO), has the closing time elapsed by checking whether "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112? Whether or not it is determined (S1202). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where "1" is set in the zero flag in the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" means that the closing time has passed. If it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1202: NO), the processing during closing of this special electric train is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1202: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter (S1203). Subsequently, the read processing of the open duration is executed (S1204). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k, the result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out and based on these. The information on the duration for opening the large winning opening 59a is read out. In the pachinko machine 10, the opening duration is set to correspond to a long time mode in all rounds in each hit result. Then, the read information on the open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1205).

Subsequently, the open setting process is executed (S1206). The processing content of the opening setting process is the same as the opening setting process of step 905 in the special electric power start process (FIG. 25). Next, after setting the release command as the output target (S1207), the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (S1208). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric power closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 1208 is executed. It becomes. After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is "0" (S1201: YES), the ending command is set as the output target (S1209). The ending command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1210). Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1211). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special figure closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" when the process of step 1211 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

Next, the special electric power termination process of step 313 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special electric power termination process. The special electric power end process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "6".

First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1301). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1301: NO), the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1301: YES), the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is set to the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114. With reference to the flag stored in, it is determined whether or not the result is a probability variation hit (S1302). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation hit result (16R probability variation hit result or 4R probability variation hit result) (S1302: YES), the high probability mode flag is set in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114. If it is not stored, the high probability mode flag is stored (S1303). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode that ended this time is not a probability variation hit result (16R normal hit result or 4R normal hit result) (S1302: NO), there is a high probability. If the mode flag is stored, after erasing the high probability mode flag (S1304), the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g of the main RAM 114 (if the time saving flag is already stored). (Maintain as it is) and set "100" to the time reduction counter in the time reduction counter area 114h (S1305). In the process of step 1303 or step 1305, the flags indicating the information corresponding to the types of hit results are also deleted from the various hit result flag storage areas 114k.
After executing the process of step 1303 or step 1305, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S1306), and the special electric end process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the open / close execution mode is executed when the game ball passes through the variable winning device starting gate 61 (FIG. 25, S901: YES), and the variable winning device starting gate The game ball that has passed through 61 always wins a prize in the special second starting port 58. That is, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, at least one second lottery game is held. Therefore, in the first special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21) after the special electric stop process (FIG. 29) is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step 601 in the data setting process (FIG. 22) of step 502, and the affirmative determination is made in step 503. The winning / failing determination of the second lottery game is executed in the winning / failing determination process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control process is executed by using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter.
For this reason, when the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games composed of the effect for game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, the special figure special electric counter may be referred to. It is not necessary to check multiple flags at each processing timing as in. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, in each of the processes of steps 307 to 313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for ending a certain situation and performing a transition to the next situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, "0", which is the initial value of the special figure special electric counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of game situations including the effect for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to set the first situation in the above series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter after the initialization of the main RAM 114 or the like.

Further, when updating the special figure special electric counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

Further, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above series of game situations is set separately from each process of steps 307 to 313, and refer to the special figure special electric counter. It is not included in each process executed. As a result, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information can be simplified.

Further, among the processes of steps 307 to 313, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period is measured by using a common period measuring means called a special figure special electric timer counter. The measurement is done. As a result, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situations corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter do not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is referred to at the same time in a plurality of situations. There is no such thing, and the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

Further, the process of updating the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process in step 211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) set as a process different from steps 307 to 313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electric timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps 307 to 313.

Further, the confirmation of whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" is collectively performed in step 305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), and is performed in steps 308, S309, and S311 to 313. In each process, the passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112. As a result, in each process of steps 308, S309, S311 to 313, when numerical information is read from the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 114 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is "0". Compared with, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Here, the special figure special electric counter is referred to in order to confirm which situation is in a series of games including the effect for game rotation and the open / close execution mode even in the processing other than the special figure special electric control processing. To. For example, the special figure special electric counter is also referred to in the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), and the demo display process will be described later.

Next, the normal drawing control processing executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the Fuzu Fuden control process.

In the normal symbol control process, when a prize is generated in the normal symbol start gate 60, a process for acquiring the hold information of the normal symbol is executed, and the hold information of the normal symbol is stored. In addition, the release determination of the electric accessory 66 is performed for the reserved information, and further, the opening determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for a normal symbol. Further, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 66 is executed based on the result of the opening determination.

Specifically, first, the process of acquiring the hold information of the ordinary symbol is executed (S1401). In the acquisition process, the numerical information of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (that is, the hold information of the normal symbol) is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 60. Execute the process to be performed. It should be noted that the acquisition of the hold information of the ordinary symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of hold (4 in this embodiment).

Next, a process of reading the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1402), and the Fuzu Fuden address table storage area 113h of the main ROM 113 is used. The process of reading the information in the address table is executed (S1403). Then, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden address table is executed (S1404).

Explaining the processing contents of steps 1402 to 1404, as described above, the fuzu-fuden control process includes a process related to the effect for the fuzu and a process related to opening / closing of the electric accessory 66. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the normal map, the normal map fluctuation start process, the normal map change process, and the normal map finalization process are set. Further, as the processing related to the opening and closing of the electric accessory 66, a processing during the opening of the electric power and a processing during the closing of the electric power are set.

In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is stored in the Fuzu Fuden address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

Explaining the Fuzu Fuden address table with reference to Fig. 31, the Fuzu Fuden counter can set numerical information from "0" to "4", and the Fuzu Fuden address table has Fuzu. The start address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the general electric counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the process during confirmation of the normal figure, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during the opening of the normal power, and the start address NSA4 is the closed state of the normal power. The start address of the program for executing the process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter.

According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special electric control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process should be executed as the normal figure normal electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the Fuzu Fuden counter and the Fuzu Fuden address table, the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the Fuzu fluctuation processing, the Fuzu confirmation processing, the Fuden opening processing, and the Fuden closing processing are performed. The processing configuration for execution will be described.

After executing the process of step 1404, the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol is executed (S1405). In the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol, the numerical information of the normal-sized timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read from the normal-sized normal-sized timer counter area 114j, and the numerical information of the normal-sized normal-sized timer counter is "0". In the case of "", the process of setting "1" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is executed.
In other words, when the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter is not "0", the process of setting "0" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (erasing "1"). To execute. The Fuzu Fuden timer counter is a counter used by the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the Fuzu Fuden counter according to the passage of time, and is step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Numerical information is subtracted in the timer update process of.

Next, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1404 is executed (S1406). Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation start process (S1407), and when the acquired start address is NSA1, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation process (S1408). , If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the normal drawing confirmation processing (S1409), and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the normal electric opening processing (S1410) and the acquired start. If the address is NSA4, the process (S1411) during closing of the normal electric power is jumped.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S1407), on the condition that the hold information of the normal symbol is stored, the release determination of the electric accessory 66 is performed using the hold information of the normal symbol, and the main display unit 71 In the other display unit 71d of the above, the process of starting the variable display (blinking display) of the pattern is executed. In the open determination of the electric accessory 66, the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of winning than the low-frequency support mode. Further, whether or not the high frequency support mode is set is determined based on whether or not the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored. However, as will be described later in the fourth embodiment below, step 504 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21) even in the high frequency support mode (even if the high frequency support flag is stored). When it is determined that the winning is won, the opening judgment of the electric accessory 66 is that the opening / closing execution mode due to the winning is changed from the time when the corresponding variation display corresponding to the winning is confirmed. The same judgment as in the low frequency support mode is executed until the end. Further, in the normal figure fluctuation start processing, the information of the variable display time for displaying the pattern in a variable manner on the other display unit 71d is set in the normal figure normal electric timer counter, and the variable display of the pattern on the other display unit 71d is started. In this case, the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "0" to "1".

In the normal map changing process (S1408), other processes for updating the display on the display unit 71d are executed. In this case, on condition that the passage of the variable display time is confirmed, the information of the fixed time is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

In the normal figure confirmation processing (S1409), a process for displaying the result of the opening determination this time on the other display unit 71d for the confirmation time of the normal symbol is executed, and the result of the opening determination is the winning result. A process for opening the electric accessory 66 and a process for setting the number of times of opening the electric accessory 66 when the electric accessory 66 is opened are executed with the winning result of this time as an opportunity. In this case, on condition that the passage of the fixed time of the normal symbol has been confirmed and the result of the opening judgment is the winning result, the information of the opening duration of this time in the electric accessory 66 is input to the Fuzu Fuden timer counter. At the same time, the electric accessory 66 is opened, and the normal-figure counter is updated from "2" to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the opening judgment is not the winning result even though the lapse of the confirmation time of the normal symbol is confirmed, the electric accessory 66 is not set to be in the open state, and the normal figure general electric counter is set to ". 0 ”The processing to clear is executed.

In the process of opening the electric accessory (S1410), the process for maintaining the open state of the electric accessory 66 and closing the electric accessory 66 when the closing timing is reached is executed. In this case, on condition that the elapse of the opening duration of the electric accessory 66 is confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 66 is set in the normal electric timer counter, and the electric accessory 66 is closed. The state is set, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4".

In the process during closing of the electric utility (S1411), when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 66 and to open the electric accessory 66 again, the process for opening the electric accessory 66. To execute. In this case, on condition that it is confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 66 has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the electric accessory 66, the information on the current opening duration of the electric accessory 66 is provided. It is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, the electric accessory 66 is opened, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "4" to "3". On the other hand, if it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 66 again even though the lapse of the closing duration of the electric accessory 66 has been confirmed, the electric accessory 66 is not set to be in the open state. Figure The process of clearing the normal power counter to "0" is executed.

When any of the processes of steps 1407 to 1411 is executed, the present power control process is terminated.

As described above, by using the Fuzu Fuden counter, the Fuzu Fuden address table, and the Fuzu Fuden timer counter to execute the Fuzu Fuden control process, the production and electric role for the Fuzu When the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games consisting of the opening and closing of the object 66, it is sufficient to refer to the Fuzu Fuden counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, when updating the Fuzu Fuden counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. Further, since the zero flag of the normal symbol is used as in the case of the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control processing, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Next, the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a demo display process.

First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1501). When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the effect for the game round is not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed.

Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence or absence of the flag that the effect for game rounds is being executed as in the conventional case, and the presence or absence of the flag is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, first It is necessary to read the information of the flag of 1 from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information, and then read the information of the other flag from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information. Then, it is necessary to specify the address to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to set the data in the register at least twice when the data is transferred to the address. On the other hand, by using the special figure special electric counter, the address to the main RAM 114 can be specified only once, and the data setting process to the register when data is transferred to it can be done only once. .. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

If it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is not "0" (S1501: NO), the process for displaying this demo is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1501). : YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the demo display state (S1502).

The demo display state means that the symbol display device 80 has already performed the demo display (that is, the standby display), and the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. In addition, the demo display is a predetermined demo display waiting time (for example, after the confirmation time elapses after displaying the stop result of the previous game round or after the ending of the previous open / close execution mode is completed. , 0.1 sec), the image of the start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 perform the effect accordingly. To say.

In the demo display on the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the effective line performs a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbol is a predetermined one. After or instead of displaying the operating image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed.

If it is determined that the demo display state is present (S1502: YES), the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the demo display state is not present (S1502: NO), the demo display wait state is set. Whether or not it is determined (S1503). The demo display waiting state means that the measurement of the demo display waiting time has already started, and the demo display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. is there.

When it is determined that the demo display waiting state is not set (S1503: N0), the demo display waiting time information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the demo display waiting time information is used as the special figure special electric timer counter. (S1504). Subsequently, the demo display waiting state is set by storing the demo display waiting flag in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114 (S1505). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the demo display waiting state is in effect (S1503: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1506). If it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" (S1506: NO), the demo display process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1506: YES), the demo display state is set by storing the demo display flag in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114 (S1507). ). In the process of step 1507, the demo display waiting flag is cleared to release the demo display waiting state. In addition, the demo display state is canceled by clearing the demo display flag when the effect for the game round is newly started. Next, the demo start command is set as the output target (S1508). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, execution control of effect and notification using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in, for example, 4 msec.

In the timer interrupt processing, first, the main command storage process is executed (S1601), and the display side command storage process is executed (S1602). The main command storage process in step 1601 is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the audio side RAM 154 when a command is received from the main MPU 112, and the display side command storage process in step 1602 is the display side. When a command is received from the MPU 162, this is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the audio side RAM 154. This command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Next, the main command correspondence process for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 112 is executed (S1603), and the display side command correspondence for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the display MPU 162 is executed. The process is executed (S1604). In the display-side command correspondence process in step 1604, although specific description is omitted, since various commands are transmitted from the display-side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing during the game (FIG. 36, S1907), the received command is used. Execute the corresponding process. The main command correspondence process in step 1603 will be described in detail later.

Subsequently, the frame button correspondence process is executed (S1605). In this frame button correspondence process, for example, a predetermined key of the second frame button 27 is operated by the player on the condition that the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times or open / close execution mode). If so, set the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation for updating. Further, if the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times and open / close execution mode), or if one unit of game times is processed, the variation display of the game times is stopped. The first frame button 26 is provided on the condition that the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect such as the conversation effect or the character effect) is not displayed before the predetermined period (for example, before the predetermined period when the reach is displayed). Is operated by the player, a stage change command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. As a result, the display side MPU 162 changes the background stage displayed on the display screen 80a in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage" and displays it. Further, if the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during the period in which the notice effect in the case where one unit of the game times is processed is displayed, the notice response effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. To do. As a result, on the display side MPU 162, the response effect corresponding to the notice effect is displayed on the display screen 80a, and a new character pattern, moving image, or the like is displayed. Whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated is determined by a signal from the first frame button detection sensor 26a that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26. Similarly, whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from the second frame button detection sensor 27a that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

Next, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 is executed (S1606), and a voice control process for performing voice control of the speaker unit 34 is executed (S1607). In the light emission control process and the voice control process, when the information is set for update in the frame button correspondence process in step 1605, the main command correspondence process (FIG. 35) described later, or the display side command correspondence process. It is executed based on the information. Subsequently, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S1608).

Next, the main command correspondence process in step 1603 in the timer interrupt process of the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34 and 35 are flowcharts showing main command correspondence processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command are received from the main MPU 112 (S1701), and if it is determined that these commands are received (S1701: YES), the game result is stored. Is executed (S1702). Specifically, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game round is specified from the variation command, the presence or absence of reach occurs from the variation display time, and the normal reach when reach occurs. Alternatively, it is specified which is the super reach, and the process of writing the specified information to the retained data area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed. In addition, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game round, that is, the game of this game round. Information on whether or not the result is a winning result, and if it is a winning result (winning in the winning or losing lottery), is specified, and the specified information is stored in the retained data area provided in the audio side RAM 154. The process of writing to 154b is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154b is data that is temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the notification, and after these effects and notifications are started. Is also an area for storing and holding data to be independently used by the voice MPU 152.

Next, the advance notice lottery process is executed (S1703). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 80 in this game round. As this notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 80 starts the variable display of the symbol, or a part of the notice display. In a situation where a symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the previous mode. It also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the winning results than in the game times corresponding to the missed results, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

Next, the stop symbol determination process is executed (S1704). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a winning result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is used as the information of the current stop result. decide. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Subsequently, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed (S1705). In this process, information on the variation display time of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information on the variation display time, the information on the game result specified in step 1702 above, and An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in step 1703 is selected.

Next, a process of writing the type of the stop symbol determined in step 1704 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 1705 to the holding data area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S1706). Since the effect pattern includes information on the variable display time of the game times this time, by writing the information on the effect pattern in the holding data area 154b, not only the information on the effect pattern but also the information on the variable display time can be obtained. However, the voice side MPU 152 can be read again. In addition, the voice side MPU 152 can again grasp whether or not the current game round is a winning result from the type of the stop symbol.

Subsequently, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 1704 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 1705 are transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1707). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of this command will be described later.

Next, the game count update process is executed (S1708). In this update process, a process for updating the game count counter is executed so that the number of digested games measured by the game counters provided in the various counter areas 154c of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of digested games is the number of games that have been digested after the end of the open / close execution mode without shifting to the open / close execution mode again. In the voice side MPU 152, the information on the number of digested games can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of digested games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is easy to select a predetermined notice display in the notice lottery process. Execute the processing that becomes.

It is determined whether or not the fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received when it is determined that the change command and the type command have not been received (S1701: NO) or after the game count update process has been executed. (S1709). Then, when it is determined that the confirmation stop command has been received (S1709: YES), the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1710). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to make the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S1709: NO), or after the process of transmitting the symbol stop command is executed, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1711). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1711: YES), the update process for the number of hits is executed (S1712). In the update process, a process for updating the hit count counter is executed so that the number of hits measured by the hit count counters provided in various counter areas 154c of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called continuous hits) that occur after shifting to the high-frequency support mode without shifting to the low-frequency support mode. In the audio side MPU 152, the information on the number of hits can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is a predetermined number or more, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image in the open / close execution mode can be produced. To be executed.

Next, the opening correspondence process is executed (S1713). In the opening correspondence process, the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect content in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the hit result is determined. Execute the processing for. For example, the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the 16R probability variation hit result, and in the game round immediately before that, the symbol display device 80 does not use the same odd-numbered symbol combination, but the same even-numbered symbol. When the final stop display of the combination is displayed, an effect including a content for making the player recognize that it is a 16R probability variation hit result is determined as an effect during the opening / closing execution mode this time. That is, in the production of the game times, the hit result with the low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent hit production, the hit promotion effect indicating that the hit is the hit with the high game value is determined as the effect in the open / close execution mode. To do.

As already explained here, in the holding data area 154b of the audio side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the stop symbol of the game times in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game times. , When the open / close execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the retained data area 154b are cleared when the open / close execution mode ends. .. Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the open / close execution mode as described above. ..

Further, in the opening corresponding process of step 1713, the number of hits after the update in step 1712 is specified, and the effect corresponding to the specified number of hits is set as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode this time.

Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 1713 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1714). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1711: NO), or after the process of transmitting the opening command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S1715). When it is determined that the release command has been received (S1715: YES), the display side MPU 162 is notified that the variable winning device 59 has been newly started to be released, that is, one round game has been newly started. A release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 for recognition (S1716). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the release command will be described later.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1715: NO), or after the process of transmitting the release command is executed, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S1717). When it is determined that the closing command has been received (S1717: YES), the display is displayed so that the display side MPU 162 recognizes that the variable winning device 59 has been closed, that is, the round game of 1 has been completed. A closure command is sent to the side MPU 162 (S1718). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S1717: NO), or after the process of transmitting the closing command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received as shown in FIG. (S1801). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1801: YES), the ending correspondence process is executed (S1802). In the ending correspondence process, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the winning / losing lottery mode is executed. To do. In the present embodiment, since the high-probability mode is always set after the opening / closing execution mode, the effect including the content for making the player recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time.

Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 1802 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1803). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1801: NO), or after the process of transmitting the ending command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S1804). When it is determined that the notification command is being received (S1804: YES), it means that an event to be notified such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In order to perform the notification, the light emission data is read out from the various data table storage areas 153a (S1805), and the audio data is read out (S1806). As a result, in the light emission control process (S1606) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission is performed according to the light emission data, and the voice control of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) is performed. In the process (S1607), the voice of the speaker unit 34 is controlled so that the sound corresponding to the voice data is output. After that, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1807). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so that the notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1804: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S1808). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. Therefore, when it is determined that the release command has been received (S1808: YES), it means that the event to be notified such as the abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10 has been canceled. In order to cancel the notification, the release setting process is executed (S1809). After that, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1810). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1808: NO), or after the release command has been transmitted and other corresponding processing is executed (S1815), the main command correspondence process is terminated. In other corresponding processing, for example, when the hold command is received, the hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162, and when the shift time command is received, the shift time command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. .. As a result, in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Dt, Ds and the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80, the reserved area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 is stored. A predetermined reserved symbol is displayed in the corresponding display area. Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. As a result, the demo display is started on the symbol display device 80.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU 162, and this V interrupt processing is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP165 of the display control device 93 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 80, the VDP165 starts to output the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the front view of the display screen 80a, and the dot The image signal is sequentially output to the dots lined up on the horizontal line including one end, and the image signal is output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line, and the front view right of the display screen 80a. Finally, the image signal is output for the dots in the lower corner. In this case, the VDP 165 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display side MPU 162 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display side MPU 162 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal.

However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started. Further, as described above, when data is not set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the reserved symbol display area 167a (data meaning a blank is set), the reserved symbol is displayed. No image is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds, Dt, and Du of the display screen 80a corresponding to the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the use area 167a, or the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. The background image is displayed.

In the V interrupt process, first, the content of the command stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 is analyzed (S1901). In the command storage area 164a, commands are sequentially stored by a command storage process that is activated when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 92. This command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Subsequently, based on the analysis result of step 1901, it is determined whether or not a new command is being received (S1902), and if it is determined that a new command is being received (S1902: YES), the command correspondence process is performed. Execute (S1903).

Here, the command correspondence process of step 1903 in the V interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process.

In the command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the stop result command and the pattern command are received (S2001). When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have been received (S2001: YES), the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. After executing the data table setting process for the pattern to be written to the work RAM 164 (S2002), the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the game round is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round is defined.

In addition, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game times is set in the pattern data table, and the task content information and command output correspond to each pointer information. Information on the presence or absence of and information on additional data are set.

The task content information is information that is set to display the video corresponding to this game time, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information at all is set as additional data, each An image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in the frame.
In the information of the content of the task, information of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 and the type of the command. In this way, by making the command output from the display side MPU 162 to the audio side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, the various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 respond to the content of the image. In addition to being able to produce light, the speaker unit 34 can also produce audio output according to the content of the image.

The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when the notification command is received or the warning response effect command is received. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content.

When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have not been received (S2001: NO), it is determined whether or not the fixed stop command has been received (S2003). If it is determined that the fixed stop command has been received (S2003: YES), the fixed stop setting process is executed (S2004), and then the command corresponding process is terminated. In the setting process for fixed stop, the data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round until the period during the fixed stop display elapses is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to.

When it is determined that the confirmation stop command has not been received (S2003: NO), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2005). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2005: YES), the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2006). Terminate command handling processing.

The opening data table is used to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information that defines the processing required for.
The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

In the data table for the opening, the contents of the effect are defined during each round game and during the interval period between the round games from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until the end of the corresponding round game, and similarly, the data during the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until. Then, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the opening command is received, as shown in FIG. 38, the game ball is passed through the characters "big hit !!", the corresponding background image (not shown), and the variable winning device start gate 61. An opening image is displayed suggesting that it should be fired (right-handed). Then, when the player hits the game ball to the right while the opening image is displayed and the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61, the main MPU 112 performs the special electric start process (FIG. 25) in step 901. An affirmative judgment is made, and the release command is set as the output target in step 906. In other words, the opening image continues to be displayed on the symbol display device 80 until the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2005: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the open command and the close command has been received (S2007). If it is determined that any of the commands has been received (S2007: YES), the processing corresponding to this command is terminated after the setting processing at the time of opening / closing is executed (S2008). In the setting process at the time of opening and closing, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

When it is determined that the open command and the close command have not been received (S2007: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2009). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2009: YES), the setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2010). Terminate command handling processing.

The ending data table is necessary to display one frame of images at each update timing of the images when displaying the moving image corresponding to the effect for the ending on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2009: NO), another corresponding process (S2011) is executed, and then this command corresponding process is terminated.

Next, another corresponding process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing another corresponding process.

In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification command is received (S2101). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2101: YES), the notification data setting process is executed (S2102), and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the notification data setting process, the notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written to the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table.
As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is added to the effect image for the game round and the effect image for the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2103). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2103: YES), the notification data clearing process is executed (S2104), and then the corresponding processing is terminated. In the notification data clearing process, among the notification data currently set in the additional data in the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type to be released is canceled.

If it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2103: NO), and after executing other corresponding processing (S2105), the corresponding processing for each is terminated.

In other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received, and when it is determined that a hold command is being received, the display of the hold information on the symbol display device 80 corresponds to an increase in the number of holds. The process of writing the information to be changed to the work RAM 164 is executed. Since the hold command includes information on which of the first start port 56 and the second start ports 57 and 58 is the hold information for winning the prize, the display screen 80a is won. The display of the number of pending items on the side is increased. Further, when it is determined that the advance notice response effect command is received, the response effect data corresponding to the advance notice effect (conversation effect or character effect) is written. As a result, after the next image update timing, the response effect to the advance notice effect is started.

Further, it is determined whether or not the shift command is received, and if it is determined that the shift command is received, the shift setting process is performed. In the shift setting process, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information set in each unit area RE1 to RE4 and RF1 to RF4 of the reserved symbol display area 167a to the lower area side or the execution unit area RG is transmitted to the work RAM 164. Write. Specifically, since the shift command includes information on which reserved symbol information is to be shifted, when shifting the reserved symbol information in the first reserved symbol display area RE, the first Unit area RE1 → Execution unit area RG is written with information to shift the reserved symbol information, 2nd unit area RE2 → 1st unit area RE1, 3rd unit area RE3 → 2nd unit area RE2, 4th unit area RE4 → Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RE3, is written. Similarly, when shifting the second reserved symbol display area RF, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the first unit area RF1 → the execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RF2 → the first unit area RF1. , 3rd unit area RF3 → 2nd unit area RF2, 4th unit area RF4 → 3rd unit area RF3, etc. Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area is written. As a result, the reserved symbols in the lower display area Dn are shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area having a smaller number.

Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the data table for displaying the demo is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to. Further, it is determined whether or not the stage change command is received, and if the stage change command is received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is displayed from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. The process of reading and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the game times is not displayed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 36), when it is determined that there is no new command (S1902: NO), or when the command corresponding process in step 1903 is executed, the pointer update process is executed (S1904). In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the display side MPU 162 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

Next, the task process is executed (S1905). Here, the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a task process executed by the display side MPU 162.

In the task processing, first, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the pointer this time in the data table (S2201), and when it is determined that the additional data does not exist (S2201). : NO), the task data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2202). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data (S2203). ), End this task processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the data table that additional data exists in the area corresponding to the pointer information this time (S2201: YES), whether or not the additional data is additional data to the image of the task data. Is determined (S2204). When it is determined that the data is additional data (S2204: YES), the task data and additional data of the pointer of this time are read from the data table (S2205). Then, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data and the additional data, after performing the calculation of the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 (S2206). , End this task processing. The cases where the processes of steps 2205 and 2206 are executed include the case where a character image of the notification is added.

When it is determined that the additional data is not the additional data (S2204: NO), the additional data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2207). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read additional data ( S2208), this task processing is terminated. In addition, the case where the processing of step 2207 and step 2208 is executed includes the case where the response effect to the advance notice effect is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 36), after executing the task process of step 1905, whether or not the command data exists in the area of the data table where there is no command output corresponding to the information of the pointer this time. It is determined whether or not it is the command output timing by determining (S1906). If the command data exists, it is determined that it is the command output timing (S1906: YES), and the command setting process is executed (S1907). In this command setting process, a command is transmitted based on the timing (pointer information) determined to be the command output timing. Specifically, a command indicating that the production of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the advance notice production should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, A command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, a command indicating that the effect of the open / close execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the interval between round games should be started, and a command indicating that the effect of the ending should be started. A command, a command indicating that the demo display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the audio side MPU 152 according to each timing.

In this case, a command indicating that the advance notice effect should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode effect should be started, and a round. The command indicating that the effect of the interval between games should be started and the command indicating that the effect of the ending should be started include the contents of the type of the effect.

In addition, the command indicating that the advance notice production should be started, the command indicating that the normal reach should be started, the command indicating that the super reach should be started, and the command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended are the commands of the relevant command. It contains information indicating how many frames after the output timing the target effect should be started. As a result, even if these commands are transmitted at a timing prior to the start timing of the target effect for each command, the voice MPU 152 synchronizes with the start of the target effect on the symbol display device 80 and transmits electricity. It is possible to start the target effect on the light emitting unit including the decoration unit 33 and the speaker unit 34.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice side MPU 152 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 162 when the main side MPU 112 is used as a reference, but the voice side MPU 152 has a command transmitted from the display side MPU 162. Control of the production is also performed based on. Therefore, it is difficult for a gap between the light emitting effect and the sound effect executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display effect executed by the display side MPU 162 to occur, and the effect using each effect means is preferably executed. Can be done.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 36), when it is determined that the command output timing is not reached (S1906: NO), or when the command setting process of step 1907 is executed, after the drawing list output process is executed (S1908). ), Ends this V interrupt process. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP165.
In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, the image of one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, first, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged, and when the winning lottery is won (FIG. 21, S504: YES), the game ball opens and closes by passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61. The execution mode is started (FIG. 25, S901: YES). Therefore, when the player wins the winning lottery, the player can start the opening / closing execution mode (round game) at the player's own timing.

Here, as in the present embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are provided and the second lottery game is won, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first lottery game is won. A problem (problem) that may occur in a game machine having a high probability of being given the open / close execution mode will be described.

That is, in such a game machine, the player expects that the second lottery game is executed in the high frequency support mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is given by the second lottery game as a hit. Expect. In other words, the player does not want the first lottery game to be performed in the high frequency support mode itself. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the first lottery game is a hit, and the result is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the second lottery game is a win (in the present embodiment, for example, 4R). (Usually hit), the player has a dislike for the game machine even though the privilege game is given.

However, in the present embodiment, the special second starting port 58 is arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always enters. Therefore, at least one second lottery game is held after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Therefore, in the first game round in the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the second lottery game is always executed. Then, in the high frequency support mode, since the electric accessory 66 is likely to be in the open state, the player hits the game ball to the right to continuously win the game ball in the normal second starting port 57. be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, only the second lottery game can be executed, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine. Further, by confirming that the second lottery game is executed as the first lottery game after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the player can perform the subsequent development in the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. You can enjoy the opening / closing execution mode (round game) while expecting, and you can further improve your interest in the game.

In addition, it has a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode, and when the second lottery game is won, the probability that the opening / closing execution mode, which is more advantageous for the player than when the first lottery game is won, is given. In the game machine in which the probability is high, a game machine has been conventionally proposed in which the degree of expectation of winning a winning lottery is first notified by a reserved symbol. However, in the conventional game machine, when the winning lottery is won in the low frequency support mode (when the winning lottery is won in the state where the second lottery game is not held), the high frequency support after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Since the second lottery game is not always executed in the first game in the mode, when a reserved symbol with high expectation is displayed, the winning lottery is won with the reserved symbol with high expectation. In consideration of the above, there is a problem that the launch is stopped for fear that the first lottery game will be executed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

Further, it has a high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode, and when the second lottery game is won, the probability that the opening / closing execution mode which is more advantageous for the player than when the first lottery game is won is given. Conventionally, in the low-frequency support mode, when a variable display is displayed on the symbol display device 80, a specified number of game balls are won in the first starting port 56 (first lottery). A gaming machine has also been proposed that notifies the expected degree of hit of the fluctuation display by holding a specified number of games). However, in such a conventional game machine, when the winning lottery is won in the low frequency support mode (when the winning lottery is won in the state where the second lottery game is not held), after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. Since the second lottery game is not always executed in the first game in the high frequency support mode, the launch is stopped for fear that the first lottery game will be executed after the open / close execution mode ends. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot fully enjoy the production mounted on the game machine.

However, as in the present embodiment, by ensuring that the second lottery game is executed in the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the player can perform the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode. The game can be continued without fear of the first lottery game being executed. That is, according to the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while fully enjoying the effect mounted on the game machine, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In other words, according to the present embodiment, various effects can be mounted on the game machine, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won by the variable winning device 59, the variable winning device start gate 61 (special second starting port) is set in the second region RT, which is the path through which the game ball flows down to the variable winning device 59. 58) is arranged. Therefore, it is necessary to change the method of launching the game ball between the case where the game ball is launched so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 and the case where the game ball is launched so as to win the variable winning device 59. There is no. That is, the act of firing the game ball so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 can be recognized by the player as a part of the act of causing the variable winning device 59 to win the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of firing the game ball so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 is troublesome. Further, since the special second starting port 58 is arranged in the second region RT, the game ball is also won in the special second starting port 58 by firing the game ball so as to win the variable winning device 59. there's a possibility that. For this reason, it is expected that a plurality of second lottery games are held after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the player is rushed to the sense of duty that the game ball must be launched immediately after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It is possible to suppress the player from being hit, and the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the open / close execution mode.

Further, the special second starting port 58 is configured so that the game ball can be won by the player hitting the right side, but it is difficult for the game ball to win the special second starting port 58 than the first starting port 56. The nail 51, the wind turbine 52, and the like are arranged so as to be. That is, in the normal state (in the low frequency support mode), the player can make the special second starting port 58 win the game ball by hitting right, but the first starting port 56 can win the game ball. If you shoot a game ball so that you can win a prize, you will have more chances to win a lottery, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the playability that is assumed in the normal state from being impaired by providing the special second starting port 58. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game value of the high frequency support mode from decreasing.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the variable winning device starting gate 61 (detection sensor 61a) may be arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 wins the special second starting port 58. Instead, it may be arranged so as to detect a winning game ball in the special second starting port 58. For example, the variable winning device start gate 61 may be provided in the passage through which the winning game ball is discharged to the special second starting port 58. That is, it may be provided in the passage where the game ball is discharged from the second region RT. That is, if at least one second lottery game is held after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the order in which the game balls enter (win) the variable winning device start gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 is appropriate. It can be changed. Further, the variable winning device start gate 61 may be shared with the special second start port 58. That is, the detection sensor 61a may be shared with the detection sensor 58a. In this way, by sharing the variable winning device starting gate 61 and the special second starting port 58, it is possible to reduce the number of parts.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, as the second starting port, the second starting port 57 may not be normally provided, but only the special second starting port 58 may be provided. In this case, for example, the special second starting port 58 is provided with an electric accessory 66, and the variable winning device starting gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 are arranged below the normal symbol starting gate 60 to perform the first implementation. The same effect as the morphology can be obtained. In such a configuration, in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 66 is opened so that the special second starting port 58 does not pass through the variable winning device starting gate 61. However, by ensuring that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 wins the special second starting port 58, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained. it can. Further, the configuration as shown in FIG. 41 can be appropriately applied to the following second and third embodiments.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable winning device start gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 may be arranged in a path through which the game balls that have not won the variable winning device 59 further flow down. That is, in the first embodiment, the variable winning device start gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 may be arranged below the variable winning device 59. Even as such a game machine, when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 and when the game ball is launched so as to win the variable winning device 59, the game ball is launched. Since it is not necessary to change the method, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of firing the game ball so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 is troublesome.

Further, the game ball may be arranged on a route different from the route until the variable winning device 59 is won, and may be arranged, for example, in the first region RS.

Further, the display of the opening image can be changed as appropriate, and as the opening image, for example, a moving image suggesting that the game ball should be launched so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 may be displayed. ..

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the method of guiding the game ball to the variable winning device start gate 61 is changed, and the other aspects are the same as those of the first embodiment. The explanation will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the passive distribution unit (distribution means) 220 is arranged above the variable winning device start gate 61 in the second region RT. That is, since the basic configuration (control) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, passive distribution is performed at a position where the game ball passes when the player hits the game ball to the right. The unit 220 is arranged.

Here, the configuration of the passive distribution unit 220 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the passive distribution unit 220.

As shown in FIG. 43, when the game ball reaches the passive distribution unit 220, the passive distribution unit 220 distributes the discharge destination of the game ball to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2, and passively distributes the game ball. A plurality of passive distribution devices 223 having a distribution member (distribution member) 221 and a branching wall portion 222 are provided. The guide area R1 is an area where the game ball can pass (enter) the variable winning device start gate 61, and the discharge area R2 is the area where the game ball passes (enters) the variable winning device start gate 61. This is a difficult area. In the present embodiment, the guide region R1 is the region on the upper side (outer rail 54 side) of the regions in which the passive distribution unit 220 is arranged in the second region RT, and the discharge region R2 is the second region RT. It is the area on the lower side (the symbol display device 80 side) of the area where the passive distribution unit 220 is arranged.

In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 221 has rod-shaped first to third projecting pieces 224 to 226 extending in one direction, and these first to third projecting pieces 224 to 226 are shaft portions 227. It has a substantially Y-shape in front view provided on the shaft portion 227 so as to be equidistantly spaced around the center. Then, by attaching the shaft portion 227 to the game board 43, the shaft portion 227 can be rotated around the shaft portion 227. Further, in the passive distribution member 221, a first accommodating portion (first passive portion) 228 capable of receiving a game ball is formed in a portion between the first projecting piece 224 and the second projecting piece 225, and a first A second accommodating portion (second passive portion) 229 capable of receiving a game ball is configured in a portion between the 1 protruding piece 224 and the 3rd protruding piece 226. Then, when the passive distribution member 221 receives the game ball at the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229, the passive distribution member 221 rotates around the shaft portion 227 due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the guide region R1 or Allocate (induce) to the discharge area R2. The rotation limit position of the passive distribution member 221 is defined by the branching wall portion 222 as described later.

The branch wall portion 222 is arranged directly below the shaft portion 227 and extends in the vertical direction in the front view. Further, in detail, the branch wall portion 222 is arranged between the second protruding piece 225 and the third protruding piece 226, and when the passive distribution member 221 rotates, the second protruding piece 225 or the third protruding piece 225 or the third It is arranged so that further rotation of the passive distribution member 221 is suppressed by contacting with the projecting piece 226. That is, the branching wall portion 222 functions as a stopper that defines the rotation limit position of the passive distribution member 221. In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 221 is arranged so that when the passive distribution member 221 is rotated, the second projecting piece 225 abuts on the branch wall portion 222 from the right side (outer rail 54 side) in front view, and the third projecting piece The 226 is arranged so as to come into contact with the branch wall portion 222 from the left side of the front view (the design display device 80 side). That is, when the passive distribution member 221 receives the game ball at the first accommodating portion 228, it rotates clockwise (second circumferential direction) to guide the game ball to the guide region R1 and guide the game ball to the second guide region R1. When it is received by the accommodating portion 229, it is arranged so as to rotate counterclockwise (first circumferential direction) and guide the game ball to the discharge region R2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the passive distribution member side magnet 224a is provided at the tip of the first protruding piece 224 opposite to the shaft portion 227, and the first protruding piece 224 is behind the game board 43. When the extension direction is the vertical direction in the front view, the base side magnet 230 is provided at a position corresponding to the passive distribution member side magnet 224a. In the present embodiment, the rotation regulating means is composed of the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230.

The passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230 are rod-shaped, respectively, and the polarity of the base side magnet 230 side of the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the passive distribution member side magnet 224a of the base side magnet 230 It is arranged so that the polarities on the sides repel each other (S poles or N poles).

As a result, the position where the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other) is the case where the first protruding piece 224 is located directly above the shaft portion 227. Since the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230 are arranged so as to have the same polarity (S poles or N poles), the first protruding piece 224 becomes the shaft portion 227 due to repulsion. It is possible to suppress the stop just above. That is, the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229 can be maintained in a state of being opened upward (a state of being rotated in the first circumferential direction or the second circumferential direction). Therefore, when the game ball reaches the passive distribution member 221, the game ball is alternately received by the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229, and is alternately discharged to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2.

The above is the configuration of the passive distribution device 223. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, five passive sorting devices 223 are continuously provided so as to be downwardly downward in the front view in the second region RT. Specifically, in each passive distribution device 223, when the game ball is distributed to the guide region R1 side by the passive distribution device 223 on the upstream side (previous stage) in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball is downstream. It is arranged so as to be received by either the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229 of the passive distribution member 221 in the passive distribution device 223 on the side (rear stage).

The variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged so that only the game balls distributed to the guide region R1 side by the passive distribution device 223 arranged on the most downstream side can pass through.

Next, the distribution operation of the game ball in the passive distribution unit 220 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the distribution operation of the two passive distribution devices 223 will be described, but the same distribution operation will be performed in the case of the five passive distribution devices 223.

As described above, the passive distribution member 221 is maintained in a state in which the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward by the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230. In FIG. 44A, the upstream passive distribution member 221 and the downstream passive distribution member 221 are shown in a state in which the first accommodating portion 228 is opened upward, respectively.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 228 of the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, the passive distribution member 221 rotates about the shaft portion 227. Then, by guiding the game ball to the guide region R1, the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 228 of the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side, the passive distribution member 221 rotates about the shaft portion 227. Then, by guiding the game ball to the guide area R1, the game ball is guided (distributed) to the variable winning device start gate 61. As a result, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 and wins a prize in the special second starting port 58 (not shown). After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1 side (variable winning device start gate 61), the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, in FIG. 44 (a), the passive distribution member 221 has the second accommodating portion 229. Since the game ball is stopped in a state of being opened upward, the game ball is received by the second accommodating portion 229, and the passive distribution member 221 is rotated to be guided to the discharge region R2 side. That is, the game ball flows down without being guided by the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the first accommodating portion 228 is opened upward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, the first accommodating portion 228 of the passive distribution member 221 is upward in FIG. 44 (d). Since it is stopped in the open state, the game ball is guided to the guide region R1 side in the same manner as in FIG. 44 (a).
After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side, in FIG. 44 (c), the passive distribution member 221 has the second accommodating portion 229. Since the game ball is stopped in a state of being opened upward, the game ball is received by the second accommodating portion 229, and the passive distribution member 221 is rotated to be guided to the discharge region R2 side. That is, the game ball flows down without passing through the variable winning device start gate 61. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (g), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, the second accommodating portion 229 of the passive distribution member 221 is upward in FIG. 44 (e). Since the game is stopped in the open state, the game ball is guided to the discharge region R2 side as in FIG. 44 (d).
That is, the game ball flows down without being guided by the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward. That is, when the distribution operation shown in FIG. 44 (g) is executed, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 44 (a).

As described above, in the passive distribution unit 220 having the two passive distribution devices 223 shown in FIG. 44, four distribution paths (2 squared) are configured, and the four game balls have four game balls. One of the game balls passes through the variable winning device start gate 61. That is, when the five passive distribution devices 223 shown in FIG. 43 are provided, 32 distribution paths (2 to the 5th power) are configured, and one of the 32 game balls is used. Passes through the variable winning device start gate 61.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, by rotating the passive distribution member 221, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 when the rotation directions of the passive distribution member 221 are in a predetermined combination. That is, in the present embodiment, if 32 game balls are fired, one game ball always passes through the variable winning device start gate 61. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball does not pass through the variable winning device starting gate 61 for a long period of time, and a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is not started because the game ball does not pass through the variable winning device starting gate 61. Can be suppressed from occurring.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game balls can be distributed by the passive distribution member 221 common to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area R1 side or the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area R2 side is separately provided.

Further, a plurality of passive distribution members 221 (passive distribution device 223) are provided, and when a game ball is guided from the upstream passive distribution member 221 to the guide region R1 side, the downstream passive distribution member 221 is provided. The game ball is guided. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of passive distribution members 221 to be arranged (when the number of passive distribution members 221 is n, distribution can be easily performed. The number of routes is 2 to the nth power), and when the player hits the game ball to the right, the probability of the game ball passing through the variable winning device start gate 61 can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Further, since the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 always wins the special second starting port 58, the probability of the game ball passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 can be easily determined by the number of passive distribution members 221. The fact that it can be changed also means that the probability of a game ball winning a prize in the special second starting port 58 can be easily changed depending on the number of passive distribution members 221. Therefore, based on the probability of the game ball winning the first starting port 56 with respect to the total number of game balls launched when the player hits the game ball to the left, the total number of game balls launched when the player hits the game ball to the right. The probability of a game ball winning a prize in the special second starting port 58 can be easily changed. That is, the winning rate of the game ball between the first starting port 56 and the special second starting port 58 can be easily adjusted.

Further, since the passive distribution unit 220 has a rotation regulating means composed of the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230, the first accommodating unit 228 and the second accommodating unit 229 are played. After receiving the ball and rotating, rotation is suppressed before the next game ball is received. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
A modified example of the second embodiment will be described. For example, in the second embodiment, if the game ball is distributed to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2 by the passive distribution device 223, the method of arranging the passive distribution device 223 can be appropriately changed. For example, when a plurality of passive distribution devices 223 are provided, the plurality of passive distribution devices 223 may be arranged so as to be downward in the front view.

Further, in the second embodiment, it is provided with only one distribution member, a detection means for detecting a game ball distributed by the distribution member, and a distribution member driving unit for driving the distribution member. , The distribution direction of the distribution member may be defined by the distribution member driving unit according to the number of game balls distributed by the distribution member. For example, after detecting that 30 game balls have passed through the discharge area R2, one game ball R1 may be guided to the guide area R1. According to this, since only one distribution member needs to be provided, the game area can be widely used.

(Third Embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is provided with two variable winning device start gates 61 as compared with the first embodiment, and is the same as the first embodiment in other respects. Therefore, description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configuration of the game board 43 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board 43 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45, the game board 43 is provided with a variable winning device starting gate 68 in addition to the variable winning device starting gate 61. Specifically, the variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged in the second region RT, and the variable winning device starting gate 68 is arranged in the first region RS. In other words, the variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball can pass when the player hits the game ball to the right, and the variable winning device start gate 68 allows the player to hit the game ball to the left. It is arranged so that the game ball can pass through when it is played.

The variable winning device starting gate 61 and the variable winning device starting gate 68 have the same configuration, but in order to facilitate the distinction, the variable winning device starting gate 61 will be referred to as the first variable winning device starting gate in the following. (1st privilege game start ball entry part) 61, and the variable winning device start gate 68 will be described as the 2nd variable prize device start gate (2nd privilege game start ball entry part) 68.

Further, the game board 43 is provided with a detection sensor 68a (see FIG. 46) corresponding to the second variable winning device start gate 68. Then, when the game ball passes through the second variable winning device start gate 68, the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 68a, and the detection result is output to the main control device 91.

Further, the game board 43 is provided with nails 51, windmills 52, etc., and the nails 51, windmills 52, etc. are the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the first variable winning device start gate 61. Based on the probability of the game balls passing through the first variable winning device starting gate 61, the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is set to the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68. It is arranged so that the probability of passing game balls is higher. Although not particularly limited, the probability of a game ball passing through the first variable winning device starting gate 61 with respect to the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the first variable winning device starting gate 61 is 1 /. The probability of the game balls passing through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is about 1/5 with respect to the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68. ing.

In the vicinity of the second variable winning device start gate 68, a start port corresponding to a normal second start port 57 or a special second start port 58 is not arranged. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 flows down the first region RS as it is, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 57 or the special second starting opening 58.

The above is the configuration of the game board 43 in this embodiment. Next, the difference in control from the first embodiment due to the arrangement of the second variable winning device starting gate 68 will be described.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 are provided, the main MPU 112 is the detection sensor in step 901 in the special electric starting process (FIG. 25). Judgment is made based on the detection information of 61a and the detection sensor 68a. That is, in step 901, when the game ball passes through either the first variable winning device starting gate 61 or the second variable winning device starting gate 68, an affirmative determination is made. However, as described above, since the start ports corresponding to the normal second start port 57 and the special second start port 58 are not arranged in the vicinity of the second variable winning device start gate 68, the second variable winning device is provided. Even if the opening / closing execution mode is executed by passing through the start gate 68, it is difficult for the second lottery game to be held by the game ball passing through the second variable winning device start gate 68.

Further, the basic processing contents of the audio side MPU 153 and the display side MPU 162 are the same as those in the first embodiment. However, when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command (FIG. 37, S2005: YES), as shown in FIG. 47, the character "big hit !!", a corresponding background image (not shown), is displayed on the symbol display device 80. Advantages of firing the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61, along with an image suggesting that the game ball be fired (hit right) so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61. Explanation, an image suggesting that the game ball is fired (left-handed) so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68, and the game ball is fired so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68. Display an opening image with a description of the benefits of the case.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 through which the game ball passes more easily than the first variable winning device starting gate 61 are provided. Therefore, the player can execute the opening / closing execution mode at an early stage by firing the game ball so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68.

For example, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 66 is likely to be in the open state, and the game ball is usually easily won in the second starting port 57. Therefore, when the winning lottery is won, the second lottery game is already suspended. There may be. In such a case, since it is confirmed that the winning lottery of the second lottery game that has already been held is executed after the opening / closing execution mode, the player can play the game more than the first variable winning device start gate 61. By passing the game ball through the second variable winning device start gate 68, which is easy for the ball to pass through, the opening / closing execution mode can be executed at an early stage. However, when the winning lottery is won, if the first lottery game is held and the second lottery game is not held, the game is played at the first variable winning device start gate 61 as in the first embodiment. By allowing the opening / closing execution mode to be executed by passing the ball, the player can be made to execute the second lottery game after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

That is, according to the present embodiment, when the player wants to hold the second lottery game and execute the open / close execution mode depending on the situation, the player moves the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61. It may be fired, and if it is desired to execute the open / close execution mode at an early stage, the game ball may be fired so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68. That is, the player can select the playability by himself / herself. Therefore, the range of the game can be widened, the player's interest in the game can be improved, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged in the second region RT, and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is arranged in the first region RS. Therefore, as compared with the case where the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 are arranged in the same area, the player fires toward the first variable winning device starting gate 61. The probability that the game ball launched by the player toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68 passes through the second variable winning device starting gate 68, rather than the probability that the game ball passes through the first variable winning device starting gate 61. The nearby nail 51, wind turbine 52, etc. can be easily set so that the value is higher.

(Modified example of the third embodiment)
A modified example of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 may not be arranged in different regions but may be arranged in the same region. For example, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 may both be arranged in the second region RT. When the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 are arranged in this way, for example, the second region RT is set along the flow direction of the game ball by a nail 51, a windmill 52, or the like. It is divided into two or more areas, and the player can pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61 by firing a game ball aiming at one of the divided areas, and another divided area. By launching a game ball aiming at the area, the second variable winning device starting gate 68 may be passed through. However, even in such a configuration, the nail 51, the windmill 52, and the like make it easier for the game ball to pass through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 than the first variable winning device starting gate 61. It is preferable to do so. That is, in the third embodiment, the game ball can be hit so that the player passes through the first variable winning device starting gate 61 or the second variable winning device starting gate 68 (selectively flowing down the game ball). The probability that the game ball fired toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68 will pass through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is toward the first variable winning device starting gate 61. If the probability that the launched game ball passes through the first variable winning device starting gate 61 is higher than the probability, the installation locations of the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 can be changed as appropriate. is there.

Further, in the third embodiment, as an opening image to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, a method of launching a game ball, which is likely to be advantageous to the player, is conspicuously displayed, or is likely to be advantageous to the player, depending on the situation. Only the way the player fires may be displayed. For example, when four second lottery games are already held when the winning lottery is won, even if the opening / closing execution mode is started by passing through the first variable winning device start gate 61, the second lottery is newly started. Since the lottery game is not held, the image of the suggestion of hitting the game ball to the left may be displayed prominently, or only the image of the suggestion of hitting the game ball to the left may be displayed. Further, for example, when the second lottery game is not held, the effect of passing the first variable winning device start gate 61 and executing the open / close execution mode can be sufficiently obtained, so that it is suggested to hit the game ball to the right. The image of the game may be displayed prominently, or only the image of the suggestion of hitting the game ball to the right may be displayed.

(Fourth Embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the arrangement location of the variable winning device starting gate 61 is changed with respect to the modified example of the first embodiment (see FIG. 41), and the other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment. , The description is omitted here.

First, the configuration of the game board 43 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, only the special second starting port 58 is provided as the second starting port, and usually the second starting port 57 is not provided. The special second starting port 58 is provided with an electric accessory (control member) 66.

The special second starting port 58 is located on the right side of the symbol display device 80 when viewed from the front, and is arranged below the normal symbol starting gate 60. In the present embodiment, since the game board 43 is provided with only one second starting port, the special second starting port 58 will be described below simply as the second starting port 58.

The variable winning device start gate 61 (detection sensor 61a) is not provided on the front side of the game board 43, and as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball winning the prize is discharged to the second starting port 58. It is provided in the passage 69.

The discharge passage 69 of the present embodiment has a spiral (meandering) shape at a portion between a portion communicating with the second starting port 58 and a portion where the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged. That is, the discharge passage 69 of the present embodiment has a second starting port as compared with the case where the portion communicating with the second starting port 57 and the portion between the variable winning device starting gate 61 are linear. It is configured so that the period until the game ball winning the 58 passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 is long. In other words, the discharge passage 69 of the present embodiment is configured such that the game ball winning the second starting port 58 passes through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Here, the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 30, S216) will be described. In the normal figure fluctuation start process (S1407) in the normal figure normal electric control process (FIG. 30, S216), as described above, the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 is performed using the hold information of the normal symbol, and high frequency support is provided. The mode has a higher probability of winning than the low frequency support mode. In this case, whether or not the high frequency support mode is set is basically determined by whether or not the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored, and if the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored, it is determined. Judged as high frequency support mode. However, even if the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored, if it is determined in step 504 of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 21) that the winning is won, the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 is determined. The judgment is the same as in the low frequency support mode from the time when the variable display corresponding to the winning win is confirmed until the opening / closing execution mode due to the winning is completed.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 50, the relationship between the display mode of the special symbol (variable display corresponding to the first lottery game or the second lottery game) and the lottery mode in the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 will be described. .. Note that FIG. 50 is a timing chart when the first lottery game or the second lottery game wins the lottery in the high frequency support mode (a state in which the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored).

In FIG. 50, the display mode of the special symbol based on the first lottery game or the second lottery game is considered to be changing before the time point T1, the final stop is made at the time point T1, and the time point T1 to the time point T2 extends over a fixed time. Is confirmed (final stop display). In this case, the lottery mode in the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 is the lottery in the high frequency support mode before the time point T1 (before the fixed time starts), and after the time point T1 (after the fixed time starts). It will be a lottery in low frequency support mode. That is, after the time point T1, it becomes difficult to win the opening determination of the electric accessory 66, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 58.

Then, as described above, in the main MPU 112, when the first lottery game or the second lottery game wins the lottery, whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the fixed time has elapsed. Is executed (FIG. 25, S901). That is, the variable winning device start gate 61 is effective for passing the game ball from T2 onward when the fixed time has elapsed. That is, in the main MPU 112, whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 after it becomes difficult to win the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 and it becomes difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 58. Is executed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the discharge passage 69 has a spiral shape as described above, but in a state where the player continuously hits the game ball to the right, the time point Ts before the time point T1 and The game ball that has won a prize between the time point T1 and the time point T1 is configured to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the time point T2. At the time point Ts, at least one game ball starts second when the player continuously hits the game ball to the right in the high frequency support mode (a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased). The winning rate at which the electric accessory 66 is open and the electric combination until the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 44 wins (reaches) the second starting port 58 so as to win the mouth 58. It is set based on the opening time of the object 66 and the like. However, in the state in which the player continuously hits the game ball to the right in the present embodiment, the player controls the operation handle 31 so that the game ball continuously passes on the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80. The state in which the operation amount is maintained (the state in which the game ball is fired every 0.6 sec), that is, the operation handle 31 so that the player continuously enters the game ball into the second starting port 58. It means a state in which the operation amount is maintained, and does not include, for example, a state in which even if the player continuously hits the game ball to the right, the launch is stopped for each ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the player continuously hits the game ball to the right and the game ball wins the second starting port 58 at the time point T0 which is after the time point Ts and before the time point T1. The game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the time point T2 (for example, the time point T3). That is, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after T2 when it is determined by the main MPU 112 that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61.

The speed of the game ball that wins the second starting port 58 changes depending on the degree of collision with the nail 51 or the like before winning, and the speed at the time of winning is not constant. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the fastest speed assumed when the game ball wins the second starting port 58, all the game balls that have won the second starting port 58 after the time point Ts are after the time point T2. The shape of the discharge passage 69 is set so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is provided in the discharge passage 69 through which the winning game ball is discharged to the second starting port 58. The discharge passage 69 is configured such that the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 58 passes through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, when the winning lottery is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 without any awareness of the player, and the opening / closing execution mode is immediately performed. Can be started. As a result, the player can be given a sense of speed and exhilaration, and interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, the discharge passage 69 is configured so that the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 58 after the time point Ts passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the time point T2. At the time point Ts, the player continuously hits the game ball to the right during the high frequency support mode, so that at least one game ball is moved to the second start port 58 between the time point Ts and the time point T1. It is the time when it is set to win a prize. For this reason, even if the player continuously hits the game ball to the right and wins the winning lottery, which makes it difficult for the electric accessory 66 to be in the open state, the player does not have to be aware of the game. The opening / closing execution mode can be started by passing the ball through the variable winning device start gate 61. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of running and exhilaration.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
A modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, in the fourth embodiment, the time point T2 is set as the time point in which the fixed time has elapsed in the variable display regarding the winning lottery, but the time point T2 can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case where after the fixed time has elapsed, an effect display such as "big hit !!" is displayed on the symbol display device 80, and then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61. The time point T2 may be set to the time when the fixed time and the time when the symbol display device 80 is displaying "big hit !!" or the like have elapsed. That is, in the fourth embodiment, whether or not the game ball that has won the second start port 58 after the time point Ts has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 by the main MPU 112 due to the configuration of the discharge passage 69. As long as the variable winning device start gate 61 is passed after the time point T2 for determining whether or not, the period between the time point Ts and the time point T2 may include a period for other effects and the like.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the same game board 43 as in FIG. 5 may be used, the normal second starting port 57 and the like may be provided, and the electric accessory 66 may be provided in the normal second starting port 57. In this case, the discharge passage that normally communicates with the second start port 57 may be configured as the discharge passage 69 of the fourth embodiment, and the discharge passage 69 may be provided with the variable winning device start gate 61. That is, two variable winning device starting gates 61 may be provided. In addition, this configuration can be similarly applied to the following fifth embodiment.

According to this, since the two variable winning device start gates 61 are provided, for example, in the normal state (low probability mode, low frequency support mode, the player left-hands and the game ball is hit to the first start port 57. If the first lottery game wins the lottery in a state where the player is trying to win a prize, the player may pass through one of the variable winning device start gates 61 by hitting the game ball to the right. It is possible to increase the possibility that the open / close execution mode can be started at an early stage.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, an example has been described in which the discharge passage 69 has a spiral shape to prolong the period until the game ball winning the second starting port 58 reaches the variable winning device starting gate 61. However, the configuration of the discharge passage 69 can be changed as appropriate. For example, by making the discharge passage 69 straight and forming a roughened surface in the discharge passage 69 so that the speed of the game ball slows down, the game ball winning the second starting port 58 is a variable winning device start gate. The period until reaching 61 may be lengthened.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 112 detects that the game ball that has won the second starting port 58 has passed the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a lapse of a predetermined period from the time when the winning ball is won. The detection signal output from the sensor 61a may be controlled.
For example, the detection sensor 61a may output the detection result after a lapse of a predetermined period after passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61, or detects that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61. The signal may be continuously output for a predetermined period. According to this, no mechanical configuration is required, and it is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated.

(Fifth Embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Since the present embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment in that the method of setting the variable display time is changed with respect to the fourth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configurations of the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main ROM 113 is provided with an arrival period storage area 113k in addition to the various areas 113a to 113j. The arrival period storage area 113k is until the game ball that has won the second start port 58 reaches the variable winning device start gate 61 (until the game ball detected by the detection sensor 58a is detected by the detection sensor 61a). This is the area where the arrival period of is stored. As described above, the speed of the game ball that wins the second starting port 58 changes depending on the degree of collision with the nail 51 or the like before winning, and the speed at the time of winning is not constant. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the arrival period storage area 113k stores the longest possible arrival period until the game ball winning the second starting port 58 reaches the variable winning device start gate 61. ..

Further, in the variable display time table storage area 113d, as described above, in addition to the variable display time table for reach generation and the variable display time table for non-reach generation, the variable display time table for special reach generation is also stored. .. The variable display time table for special reach generation will be described later.

In addition to the various counter areas 114a to 114n, the main RAM 114 is provided with an arrival period timer counter area 114p. The arrival period timer counter area 114p is an area in which the arrival period timer counter in which the arrival period stored in the arrival period storage area 113k is set is stored.

Next, the process of acquiring the pending information executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information. This process is basically the same as the process for acquiring the hold information described with reference to FIG. 19, and is a process for setting the arrival period in the arrival period timer counter when the game ball wins the second starting port 58. This is a process in which (S411) is added.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of the present hold information, after the process of step 410 is executed, or after it is determined in step 407 that the hold number Nb stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area NB is 4. (S407: NO) reads the arrival period stored in the arrival period storage area 113k of the main ROM 113, and reads it into the arrival period timer counter stored in the arrival period timer counter area 114p of the main RAM 114. After setting (S411), the process of acquiring the pending information is terminated. The update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the arrival period timer counter set in step 411 is executed in the timer update process of step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17).

Subsequently, the process of grasping the variation display time in step 509 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21) executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a process of grasping the variable display time. This process is basically the same as the process of grasping the variable display time described above, but the variable display time is set with reference to the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB. This is the process.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, first, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won (S2301). In this process, in step 507 of the special electric fluctuation start process (FIG. 21), if a win is won, the corresponding flag is stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k, so that the various hit result flag storage area 114k is stored. It is determined by whether or not the flag is stored.

When it is determined that the winning lottery has been won (S2301: YES), the value of the number of reservations Nb stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area NB is read, and it is determined whether or not the number of reservations Nb is 1 or more. (S2302). That is, when the winning lottery is won, it is determined whether or not the second lottery game to be determined next is reserved. Then, when it is determined that the number of holds Nb is not 1 or more (S2302: NO), that is, when it is determined that the second lottery game is not held, the arrival period stored in the arrival period timer counter area 114p of the main RAM 114 The value of the period timer counter is read out, and it is determined whether or not the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0 or more (S2303). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball that has not passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after winning the second starting port 58.

Then, when it is determined that the winning lottery has not been won (S2301: NO), when it is determined that the number of holds Nb is 1 or more (S2302: YES), or when it is determined that the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0. If this is the case (S2303: YES), the normal grasping process is executed (S2304), and then the grasping process of the variable display time is terminated. In the normal grasping process, as described in the above-described variation display time grasping process, it is determined whether or not reach occurs, and based on the determination result, the reach non-occurrence variation display time table or the reach occurrence variation display Get the variable display time by referring to the time table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the arrival period timer counter is not 0 (S2303: NO), the special grasping process is executed (S2305), and then the grasping process of the fluctuation display time is terminated. In the special grasping process, the variation display time is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for special reach generation so that the variation display time is longer than the value of the arrival period timer counter acquired in step 2303. That is, the fact that the negative judgment is made in step 2303 means that although the winning lottery is won, the second lottery game is not held and the variable winning device start gate 61 is passed after winning the second starting port 58. It means that there is a game ball that has not been played. Therefore, the game is set as the variable display time before the variable display ends so that the game ball does not pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 and the open / close execution mode is started after the variable display is completed. The variable display time for the ball to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 is acquired.
In other words, the variable display time is acquired so that the open / close execution mode is not started in the state where the second lottery game is not held.

The situation in which the number of holds Nb is 0 (S2302: NO) and the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0 (S2303: NO) is, for example, a situation in which the second start port 58 is sporadically performed in the low frequency support mode. There is a case where a game ball wins a prize. Further, for example, when switching from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the second lottery game held during the high frequency support mode is executed after switching to the low frequency support mode, and is held during the high frequency support mode. When the final second lottery game is executed, there is a case where the game ball that has finally won the second starting port 58 during the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the variable winning device starting gate 61.

Next, the process during special figure determination executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the processing during the determination of the special figure. This process is basically the same as the process during the determination of the special figure described with reference to FIG. 24, and is a process based on the value of the arrival period timer counter when it is determined that the winning lottery has been won (S803, S808). , S809) is added.

Specifically, when it is determined in step 802 that the lottery has been won (S802: YES), the value of the arrival period timer counter stored in the arrival period timer counter area 114p of the main RAM 114 is acquired, and the arrival period It is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter is 0 (S808). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball that passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 without the player launching a new game ball. Then, when it is determined that the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0 (S808: YES), that is, when it is determined that there is no game ball passing through the variable winning device start gate 61 at present, an opening command is output. Set as a target (S803).

As a result, when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command based on the opening command set as the output target in step 803 from the voice side MPU 152, as described with reference to FIG. 38 above, the character “big hit” and the corresponding background An image, an opening image suggesting that the player fires the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61 is displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0 (S808: NO), that is, it is determined that there is a game ball passing through the variable winning device start gate 61 even if the player does not newly launch the game ball. If so, a special opening command is set as the output target (S809).

Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command based on the special opening command set as the output target in step 809 from the voice side MPU 152, as shown in FIG. 55, only the characters “big hit” and the corresponding background image are displayed. A special opening image is displayed, and an image suggesting that the player fires the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61 is not displayed. That is, when the arrival period timer counter is not 0, it means that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after a predetermined period has elapsed (when the arrival period timer counter becomes 0). That is, if a negative determination is made in step 808, it means that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after a lapse of a predetermined period even if the player does not newly launch the game ball. Then, when the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61, an affirmative determination is made in step 901 of the special electric start processing (FIG. 25), and the open / close execution mode is executed.

For example, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball can continuously win the second start port 58 when the electric accessory 66 is opened, so that the player continuously enters the second start port 58. When the game ball is continuously fired so that the game ball wins, the arrival period timer counter is inevitably not 0 in many cases because the game ball continuously wins the second starting port 58. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step 808, nothing is intentionally displayed on the symbol display device 80 other than the characters "big hit" and the corresponding background image, and the game ball winning the second starting port 58 is variable. By allowing the opening / closing execution mode to be executed as it is by passing through the winning device start gate 61, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed and exhilaration (directing).

Further, as described above, the discharge passage 69 has a spiral shape, so that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the game ball was won in the second starting port 58. ing. Therefore, even if the player stops launching the game ball when a highly expected effect (variable display) is displayed on the symbol display device 80, if the winning lottery is won, the final result is the first. 2 There is a possibility that the opening / closing execution mode is started by passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a lapse of a predetermined period from the winning of the game ball in the starting port 58. Therefore, even if the player stops launching, the special opening image may be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and it is possible to give a feeling of running and exhilaration.

As described above, in the variation display time grasping process (FIG. 53), when it is determined that the hold number Nb of the second special symbol hold number storage area Nb is 0 (S2302: NO), the arrival period timer counter If it is determined that is not 0 (S2303: NO), a special grasping process is executed so that the fluctuation display time is longer than the value of the arrival period timer counter (S2305). However, a game ball may be newly won in the second starting port 58 before the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 54) after the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21) is completed. In this case, When the game ball wins in the second starting port 58, the reserved number Nb of the second special symbol reserved number storage area Nb is added by 1, and the arrival period is set in the arrival period timer counter (FIG. 52: S408, S411). That is, in the process of grasping the fluctuation display time (FIG. 53), the value of the arrival period timer counter was 0, but in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 54), the value of the arrival period timer counter was not 0. Can be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, it is determined again whether or not the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0 even in the processing during the determination of the special figure, and the opening command based on the value of the arrival period timer counter is output. By setting (FIGS. 54, S803, S809), the display can be set according to the gaming state.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning lottery is won, the second lottery game is not held, and when the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0, the fluctuation display time is longer than the value of the arrival period timer counter. (Fig. 53, S2305). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being executed in a state where the second lottery game is not held.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
A modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the speed detection sensor for detecting the speed of the game ball winning in the second starting port 58 is provided, and the game ball starts the variable winning device based on the speed of the game ball winning in the second starting port 58. The arrival period until passing through the gate 61 may be calculated. According to this, a more accurate fluctuation display time can be set.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the fluctuation display time grasping process (FIG. 53), when it is determined that the winning lottery has been won when the normal grasping process (S2304) is executed (S2301: YES), the arrival period timer The fluctuation display time may be set so that the value of the counter is acquired and the fluctuation display ends immediately before the arrival period timer counter becomes 0 if the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0. According to this, since the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 and the opening / closing execution mode is executed immediately after the variable display is completed, the player can impress the feeling of running and exhilaration.

(Other embodiments)
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Then, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. In addition, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied to an embodiment different from the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(A) Other application examples (1) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which "100" is set in the time reduction counter in step 1305 of the special electric power termination process (FIG. 29) has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, it may be "50" or "120".

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the large winning opening 59a is opened once or a plurality of times in a long-time mode, and then the large winning opening 59a is opened for a short time. The configuration may include a so-called rank-up (RU) hit that is opened once or a plurality of times in the embodiment. Further, although the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the support mode may be configured to have a winning result in which the low-probability support mode remains. For example, in the case of 4R probability variation, the support mode may remain in the low frequency support mode.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the gaming machine may not be provided with the high frequency support mode. Even for such a game machine, by making the second lottery game executed at the first game time when the open / close execution mode ends, the result is more advantageous when the second lottery game is won. Since it is likely to occur, the value of the open / close execution mode can be increased.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when the number of games played after the open / close execution mode reaches the end specified number of times (for example, 100 times), a mode with a limited number of times (so-called ST) shifts to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. ) May be installed as a game machine. In the case of such a game machine, there are some players who place importance on the feeling of running and exhilaration during ST. Therefore, especially in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the feeling of running and exhilaration is given to the player. By giving a feeling, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 59 is provided with a V winning area (used area) and a discharging area (unused area), and the game is played in the V winning area during the round game. It is also possible to shift to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends when the sphere passes.
In this case, for example, if the result of the first lottery game is won, the game ball can enter the V winning area with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%), and the result of the second lottery game is In the case of winning, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning area is higher (for example, 100%) than in the case of winning in the first lottery game. According to this, the probability of shifting to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode differs between the case where the first lottery game is won and the case where the second lottery game is won, and the result of the second lottery game is the winning. In this case, the result is far more advantageous to the player, so that the player can fully experience the effects of each of the above embodiments.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. The configuration may not be included in the winning numerical information in the probability mode.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration of granting the game ball to the variable winning device 59 or the like for winning the game ball is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out the game ball, and the function of storing the virtual game medium. In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved symbols (holding notice) related to the first and second lottery games are not displayed in the lower display area Dn of the symbol display device 80, but are provided separately from the symbol display device 80. The hold symbol may be displayed on the display screen of the display device, or the hold notice may be given by setting the movable decorative member in a predetermined notice mode, or the lamp ( The hold notice may be given by turning on the predetermined light emitting unit), or the hold notice may be given by the output of the sound from the speaker unit 34, and all or a part of each of the above embodiments may be combined. It may be configured in which a hold notice is given by.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. Further, the functions of the voice lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91, and the functions of both the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91. It may be configured as a new type. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 does not control the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 controls the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91. It may be configured to control the control device 92.

(10) Each of the above embodiments may be combined as appropriate. For example, the second embodiment may be combined with the third to fifth embodiments to include a passive distribution unit 220.

(11) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, etc.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.
In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

(B) Invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments The characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

(1) Feature A Group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a privileged gaming state such as a hit gaming state is entered. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.

Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (For example, see JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the player's interest in the game by increasing the value when the game shifts to the privilege game state. The feature A group solves this problem.

Features A1. The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of the predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second special information is acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the first special information and the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value larger than 1. When,
While executing the grant determination of whether or not the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the pass / fail information group in the grant information, the acquired information storage means Grant determination means (a function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the stored special information, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becomes the grant response result that the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game ( For example, a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for imparting an opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 59 in a long-time mode is provided.
When the first special information and the second special information are both stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means determines the grant of the second special information to the first special information. Execute before grant judgment,
Further, when the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the grant determination means is more likely to select the privilege game which is advantageous to the player than when the first special information is the grant correspondence result ( Function to execute the process of S505 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) In the game machine
The privilege game is started when it is determined that the predetermined start condition is satisfied by the privilege granting means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privileged game.

According to the feature A1, the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privilege game. Therefore, as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is executed. Therefore, in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the second special information that is likely to grant the privilege game advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result is obtained (winning the winning lottery) is always determined. By increasing the value of the privileged game, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry section". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature A2. The grant determination from the end of the privilege game until the predetermined end condition is satisfied is set as the first game mode (for example, high frequency support mode), and the grant determination when not in the first game mode In the second game mode (for example, low frequency support mode),
In the first game mode, the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first acquisition condition, and in the second game mode, the first acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second acquisition condition. The gaming machine according to feature A1 characterized by being present.

According to the feature A2, it has a first game mode and a second game mode in which the ease of satisfying the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is different, and the range of games can be expanded.

Here, the player is provided with such a first game mode and a second game mode, and when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result. The probability that the privilege game is given is high, and in the first game mode, the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first acquisition condition (the second special information is easier to acquire). The problems (problems) that may occur in the above will be explained.

That is, in such a game machine, the player expects that the second special information is given and determined in the first game mode, and the second special information is given as a result of the granting, and the privilege game is given. I expect that. In other words, the player does not want the first special information to be granted and determined in the first game mode. Then, in the first game mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, the player is given a privilege game which is more disadvantageous than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result. Even though the privileged game is given, he has a dislike for the game machine.

However, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, the second special information is always determined to be granted in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed. Then, in the first game mode, the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, the second and subsequent grant determinations after the end of the privilege game are determined by the player continuously satisfying the second acquisition condition. , Only the second special information can be determined to be granted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine by determining that the first special information is given during the first game mode. In addition, by ensuring that the second special information is granted and determined as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the player can perform the subsequent development in the first game mode after the privilege game is completed. You can enjoy the privileged games while expecting them, and you can further improve your interest in the games.

In the second game mode, it is premised that the first special information is easier to obtain than the second special information, so that the player may be disgusted by the determination that the first special information is given. Not expected. Further, in the second game mode, since the first special information is more easily acquired than the second special information, it is possible to prevent the second special information from being excessively acquired, and the value of the first game mode is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Feature A3. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry section (first start port 56) and a second start ball entry section (usually a second start port 57, special) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area. 2nd starting port 58) and
It has a privilege game start ball entry unit (variable winning device start gate 61) on which the game ball launched from the launch means can enter.
The information acquisition means determines that the first acquisition condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the first start entry portion, acquires the first special information, and acquires the second start entry. When the game ball enters the ball portion, it is determined that the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the second special information is acquired.
The privilege game start ball entry section is provided in the privilege game start ball entry section provided so that the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section enters the privilege game start ball entry section. The game ball that has entered is provided so as to enter the second starting ball entering portion, or is shared with the second starting ball entering portion.
The privilege game is started as a predetermined start condition when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the game ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry portion. A1 Or the gaming machine described in A2.

According to the feature A3, the configuration of the feature A1 can be easily realized by adjusting the arrangement relationship between the second start ball entry portion and the privilege game start ball entry portion, and the structure can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Feature A4. It has a variable winning means (variable winning device 59) that is arranged in the game area and enables the winning of the game ball when the first special information or the second special information is the result of the grant correspondence. And
The privilege game start ball entry unit is a path until the game ball launched from the launching means flows down to the variable winning means, a path through which the game ball that has not entered the variable winning means flows down, or The gaming machine according to feature A3, which is provided in a passage for discharging the gaming ball provided in the path.

According to the feature A4, the variable winning means is entered when the game ball is launched so as to enter the privilege game start entry section and when the first special information or the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result. It is not necessary to change the method of firing the game ball in the case of firing the game ball as if it were a ball. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start entry section as a part of the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start ball entry portion is troublesome.

Feature A5. In the game area, a distribution means (passive distribution unit 220) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area enters the privilege game start entry unit. The gaming machine according to the feature A3 or A4, which is characterized by being provided with.

According to the feature A5, the game balls launched into the game area are distributed by the distribution means, and a part of them enters the privilege game start entry section. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball enters the privilege game start ball entry section.

Feature A6. The region provided with the sorting means (second region RT) has a guide region (R1) leading to the privilege game start entry portion and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the game machine has a distribution member (221) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game ball in the first circumferential direction and rotating the game ball to a predetermined angle.

According to the feature A6, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature A7. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature A6, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature A7, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the privilege game start entry section can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature A8. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 228) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive portion (second accommodating portion 229) that receives the game ball, and has.
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 230, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, which comprises a passive distribution member side magnet 224a).

According to the feature A8, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Feature A9. A display means (first result display unit 71a, first result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a 2 The result display unit 71b or the symbol display device 80) is provided.
When the grant determination means determines that the first special information or the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the privilege granting means determines the determination time of the pattern corresponding to the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, which comprises determining whether or not the start condition is satisfied after the lapse of time.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to a grant determination, such as feature A9. Further, in a game machine having such a display means, generally, when the special information is given as a response result, the privilege game is started immediately (automatically) after the fixed time elapses, but in the feature A9, the privilege is given. If it is determined by the means that the start condition is satisfied after the fixed time has elapsed, the privilege game is started. Therefore, the player can also start the privilege game at his / her own timing.

(2) Feature B Group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a privileged gaming state such as a hit gaming state is entered. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.

Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (For example, see JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the player's interest in the game by expanding the range of games. Feature B group solves this problem.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 56) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area, and
A second starting ball entry portion (usually a second starting port 57, a special second starting port 58) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area.
The first special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start ball entry section, and the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry section. Information acquisition means for acquiring information (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the first special information and the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value larger than 1. When,
While executing the grant determination of whether or not the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the pass / fail information group in the grant information, the acquired information storage means Grant determination means (a function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the stored special information, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becomes the grant response result that the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game ( For example, a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for imparting an opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 59 in a long-time mode is provided.
When the first special information and the second special information are both stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means determines the grant of the second special information to the first special information. Execute before grant judgment,
Further, when the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the grant determination means is more likely to select the privilege game which is advantageous to the player than when the first special information is the grant correspondence result ( Function to execute the process of S505 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) In the game machine
The first privilege game start ball entry part (first variable prize device start gate 61) and the second privilege game start ball entry part (second variable prize device start gate 61) in which the game ball launched from the launch means can enter. 68)
The privilege game is started when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the game ball has entered the first privilege game start entry section or the second privilege game start entry section.
The first privilege game start ball entry section and the second privilege game start ball entry section are more likely to be launched when the player launches the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start ball entry section. It is provided so that the ball entry rate with respect to the total number of the launched game balls is higher than when the player launches the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start ball entry section.
The first privilege game start entry section is provided so that the game ball that has entered the second start entry section enters the first privilege game start entry section. The game ball that has entered the game start ball entry section is provided so as to enter the second start ball entry section, or is shared with the second start ball entry section. Game machine.

According to the feature B1, the first privilege game start ball entry part is provided so that the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry part enters the first privilege game start ball entry part. The game ball is provided so as to enter the second start ball entry section, or is shared with the second start ball entry section. For this reason, when the privilege game is started by the game ball entering the first privilege game start entry section, at least one second special information is stored after the privilege game is completed. In the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is executed. Therefore, in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the second special information that is likely to grant the privilege game advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result is obtained (winning the winning lottery) is always determined. By increasing the value of the privileged game, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the second privilege game start entry section, when the player launches the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start entry section, the player launches the first privilege game start entry section. It is provided so that the ball entry rate is higher than the case where the game ball is launched so as to enter the ball. That is, the second privilege game start ball entry section is provided so that the game ball can easily enter the ball than the first privilege game start ball entry section. Therefore, the player can start the privilege game at an early stage by firing the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start ball entry portion.

That is, according to the feature B1, when the player wants to store the second special information after the privilege game is completed, the player enters the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start entry section. It suffices to fire, and if it is desired to execute the privilege game at an early stage, the game ball may be fired so as to enter the second privilege game start entry section. That is, according to the feature B1, the playability can be selected by the player himself, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by expanding the range of the game. The case where the player wants to execute the privilege game at an early stage is, for example, a case where a predetermined number of second special information is already stored in the acquired information storage means.

Feature B2. The grant determination from the end of the privilege game until the predetermined end condition is satisfied is set as the first game mode (for example, high frequency support mode), and the grant determination when not in the first game mode In the second game mode (for example, low frequency support mode),
In the first game mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section, and in the second game mode, the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. The game machine according to feature B1, wherein the game ball is easier to enter than the second start ball entry portion.

According to the feature B2, it has a first game mode and a second game mode in which the ease of entering the first starting ball and the second starting ball is different, and the range of the game is widened. Can be done.

Here, the player is provided with such a first game mode and a second game mode, and when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result. The probability that the privilege game is given is high, and in the first game mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section (the second special information is acquired). The problems (problems) that may occur in the game machine (which is easy to do) will be explained.

That is, in such a game machine, a large number of players expect that the second special information is given and determined in the first game mode, and the second special information is given as a result of the granting, and the privilege game is performed. Expect to be granted. In other words, many players do not want the first special information to be given and determined in the first game mode. Then, in the first game mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, when the privilege game which is more disadvantageous than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result is given, a large number of players Despite being given a privileged game, he has a dislike for the game machine.

However, by providing the configuration of the feature B1, if the player starts the privilege game by inserting the game ball into the first privilege game start entry portion, the privilege game is started after the privilege game is completed. In the first grant determination, the second special information is always determined to be granted. Then, in the first game mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry portion, so that the player makes the second start ball entry for the second and subsequent grant determinations after the privilege game is completed. By continuously entering the game ball into the unit, only the second special information can be determined to be given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine by determining that the first special information is given during the first game mode. In addition, when the privilege game is granted by inserting the game ball into the first privilege game start entry section, the player is given the second special information as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed. It is possible to obtain a sense of security that the award is determined, and the award game can be enjoyed while expecting the subsequent development in the first game mode after the award game is completed, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the first game mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section, and when the second special information is given as the result, the second game ball has already been added. It is also assumed that special information is stored. In such a case, the player can execute the privilege game at an early stage by firing the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start ball entry portion.

In the second game mode, it is a prerequisite that the game ball is easier to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, so that the first special information is given and determined. It is not expected that the player will be disgusted. Further, in the second game mode, since it is easier for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, the game ball excessively enters the second start ball entry section. Can be suppressed, and the value of the first game mode can be suppressed from decreasing.

Feature B3. The game area has a plurality of different areas (first area RS, second area RT) in which the game ball can be selectively flowed down by a launch operation of the launch means by the player.
The first privilege game start ball entry section is provided in one area of the game area or a passage through which the game ball is discharged from the one area, and the second privilege game start ball entry section is the first privilege game start ball entry section. 1 The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the gaming machine is provided in a different area from the area provided with the privileged game starting ball entry portion, or in a passage in which the game ball is discharged from the other area. ..

According to the feature B3, in order to prepare the first privilege game start entry part and the second privilege game start entry part in different areas, the second privilege game start entry part is played from the first privilege game start entry part. The arrangement structure of the nails and the like arranged in the game area can be easily set so that the ball can easily enter.

Feature B4. It has a variable winning means (variable winning device 59) that is arranged in the game area and enables the winning of the game ball when the first special information or the second special information is the result of the grant correspondence. And
The first privilege game start entry section is a path until the game ball launched from the launching means flows down to the variable winning means, and a path through which the game ball that has not entered the variable winning means flows down. , Or the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, which is provided in a passage for discharging the gaming ball provided in the path.

According to the feature B4, the player launches the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start ball entry section, and the case where the first special information or the second special information is given as a result. It is not necessary to change the method of launching the game ball in the case of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. That is, to make the player recognize the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start entry section as a part of the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start ball entry portion is troublesome.

Feature B5. In the game area, a distribution means (passive distribution unit) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area enters the first privilege game start entry unit. 220) The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature B5, the game balls launched in the game area are distributed by the distribution means, and a part of them enters the first privilege game start ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball enters the first privilege game start entry section.

Feature B6. The region provided with the sorting means (second region RT) has a guide region (R1) leading to the first privilege game start entry portion and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the game machine has a distribution member (221) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game in the first circumferential direction and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction.

According to the feature B6, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature B7. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature B6, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature B7, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the first privilege game start entry section can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature B8. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 228) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive portion (second accommodating portion 229) that receives the game ball, and has.
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 230, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, which has a passive distribution member side magnet 224a).

According to the feature B8, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Feature B9. A display means (first result display unit 71a, first result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a 2 The result display unit 71b or the symbol display device 80) is provided.
When the grant determination means determines that the first special information or the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the privilege granting means determines the determination time of the pattern corresponding to the grant correspondence result. After a lapse of time, any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first privilege game start entry section or the second privilege game start entry section. The game machine described in one.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a display means corresponding to a grant determination, such as feature B8. Further, in a game machine having such a display means, generally, when the special information is given as a response result, the privilege game is started immediately (automatically) after the fixed time elapses, but in the feature B9, the privilege is given. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first privilege game start entry section or the second privilege game start entry section after the fixed time has elapsed by the means, the privilege game is started. Therefore, the player can also start the privilege game at his / her own timing.

(3) Feature C group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a privileged gaming state such as a hit gaming state is entered. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.

Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (For example, see JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the interest in the game by giving the player a feeling of running and exhilaration. The feature C group solves this problem.

Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 56) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least one second start ball entry portion (usually a second start port 57, a special second start port 58) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area.
The first special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start ball entry section, and the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry section. Information acquisition means for acquiring information (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the first special information and the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value larger than 1. When,
While executing the grant determination of whether or not the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the pass / fail information group in the grant information, the acquired information storage means Grant determination means (a function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that sequentially executes the grant determination for the stored special information, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becomes the grant response result that the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game ( For example, a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for imparting an opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 59 in a long-time mode is provided.
When the first special information and the second special information are both stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means determines the grant of the second special information to the first special information. Execute before grant judgment,
Further, when the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the grant determination means is more likely to select the privilege game which is advantageous to the player than when the first special information is the grant correspondence result ( Function to execute the process of S505 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) In the game machine
It has a privilege game start ball entry unit (variable winning device start gate 61) into which the game ball launched from the launch means can enter.
The privilege game is started when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry section.
The privilege game start ball entry section enters the privilege game start ball entry section after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game ball entered the second start ball entry section by the privilege granting means. A game machine characterized in that it is determined to be a ball.

According to the feature C1, when the first special information or the second special information is given, the privilege game is given by the game ball entering the privilege game start entry section, so that the privilege game is given. There is a high probability that the second special information will be stored after the end of. Then, when the second special information is stored, as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result (winning the winning lottery) is obtained. The second special information, which is easy to be given, is always determined to be given. Therefore, when the second special information is stored, the value of the privileged game is improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the privilege game start ball entry section has entered the privilege game start ball entry section after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game ball entered the second start ball entry section by the privilege granting means. It is supposed to be judged. Therefore, when the special information is given as a result, the player may not be aware of it and the game ball may enter the privilege game start entry section with the second special information stored. In that case, the privilege game is started immediately. As a result, the player can be given a sense of speed and exhilaration, and interest in the game can be further improved.

Feature C2. The grant determination from the end of the privilege game until the predetermined end condition is satisfied is set as the first game mode (for example, high frequency support mode), and the grant determination when not in the first game mode In the second game mode (for example, low frequency support mode),
In the first game mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section, and in the second game mode, the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the gaming ball is easier to enter than the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the feature C2, it has a first game mode and a second game mode in which the ease of entering the first starting ball and the second starting ball is different, and the range of the game is widened. Can be done.

Here, the player is provided with such a first game mode and a second game mode, and when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result. The probability that the privilege game is given is high, and in the first game mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section (the second special information is acquired). The problems (problems) that may occur in the game machine (which is easy to do) will be explained.

That is, in such a game machine, a large number of players expect that the second special information is given and determined in the first game mode, and the second special information is given as a result of the granting, and the privilege game is performed. Expect to be granted. In other words, many players do not want the first special information to be given and determined in the first game mode. Then, in the first game mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, when the privilege game which is more disadvantageous than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result is given, a large number of players Despite being given a privileged game, he has a dislike for the game machine.

However, by providing the configuration of feature C1, the probability that the second special information is stored after the privilege game is completed increases, and when the second special information is stored after the privilege game is completed, the privilege game is played. In the first grant determination after the end, the second special information is always determined to be granted. Then, in the first game mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry portion, so that the player makes the second start ball entry for the second and subsequent grant determinations after the privilege game is completed. By continuously entering the game ball into the unit, only the second special information can be determined to be given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine by determining that the first special information is given during the first game mode. In addition, the player obtains a sense of security that the second special information is determined as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, so that the subsequent development in the first game mode after the privilege game is completed. You can enjoy the privileged games while expecting, and you can further improve your interest in the games.

In the second game mode, it is a prerequisite that the game ball is easier to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, so that the first special information is given and determined. It is not expected that the player will be disgusted. Further, in the second game mode, since it is easier for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, the game ball excessively enters the second start ball entry section. Can be suppressed, and the value of the first game mode can be suppressed from decreasing.

Feature C3. In the second start ball entry section, the game ball is in an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start ball entry section, and the game ball enters the second start ball entry section from the open state. A control member (electric accessory 66) that can be switched between a closed state that becomes difficult and a closed state is provided.
In the first game mode, the control member is more likely to be in the open state than in the second game mode, and in the first game mode, the first special by the grant determination means. When it is determined that the information or the second special information is the result of the granting, and the predetermined condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the open state.
When the player performs a firing operation of the launching means so that the game ball is continuously entered into the second starting ball entering portion during the first game mode. It is determined by the privilege giving means that at least one of the game balls that entered before the control member became difficult to be in the open state entered the privilege game start entry portion after the lapse of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature C2, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature C3, when the player operates the launching means so as to continuously enter the game ball into the second start ball entry portion during the first game mode, the first special information or the second special information Is granted, and even if the control member becomes difficult to open, the privilege granting means determines that the game ball has entered the privilege game start entry section after the control member has become difficult to open. Will be done. Therefore, in the first game mode, when the player is operating the launching means so as to continuously enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion, the privilege game can be started immediately. It becomes more sexual and can give the player a sense of speed and exhilaration.

Feature C4. A display means (first result display unit 71a, first result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 2 It has a result display unit 71b or a symbol display device 80).
In the first game mode, the control member is unlikely to be in the open state when the fixed time is started as the predetermined condition.
The privilege granting means determines whether or not the game ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry portion after the fixed time has elapsed.
When the player performs a firing operation of the launching means so that the game ball is continuously entered into the second starting ball entering portion during the first game mode. , It is determined by the privilege granting means that at least one of the game balls that entered before the confirmation time started entered the privilege game start entry portion after the confirmation time has elapsed. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that

As described above, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with display means. Further, in a game machine provided with a display means, the pattern is stopped and displayed for a fixed time after the variable display of the pattern is completed, and the control member is difficult to be opened when the fixed time is started. However, in the feature C4, the privilege granting means determines whether or not the game ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry section after the fixed time has elapsed, and the privilege game start ball entry section is in the first game mode. If the player is operating the launching means to continuously enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering portion, the privilege granting means enters the ball before the fixed time is started. It is determined that at least one of the played game balls has entered the privilege game start ball entry section after the fixed time has elapsed. Therefore, the player decides the game ball without any consciousness by performing the launch operation of the launching means so that the game ball is continuously entered into the second start ball entry portion during the first game mode. It is possible to have the privilege granting means determine that the ball has entered the privilege game start entry section after the lapse of time.
That is, the player can start the privilege game immediately after the fixed time has elapsed.
Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of running and exhilaration.

Feature C5. Based on the grant determination of the grant determination means, the display mode determining means (a function of executing the process of S509 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for setting the period of the variation display is provided.
When the first special information or the second special information is determined by the grant determination means to be the result of the grant correspondence, the display mode determining means stores the second special information in the storage means. If it is determined that there is no ball, and it is determined that there is a game ball that has not entered the privilege game start ball entry section and has not entered the privilege game start ball entry section. The description in any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the period of the variation display is set so that the variation display ends after the game ball enters the privilege game start entry section. Game machine.

According to the feature C5, when the first special information or the second special information is given and the response result is obtained, if the second special information is not stored, the special game of the player who has entered the second starting ball entry section. When it is determined that there is a game ball that has not entered the starting ball entry section, the variation display ends after the game ball enters the privilege game starting ball entry section. Therefore, when the second special information is not stored, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the privilege game start entry section and the privilege game being given.

Feature C6. The privilege game start ball entry section is provided in a passage (69) for discharging the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section, and the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section is the predetermined one. The ball enters after the period has passed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the passage has a spiral shape.

According to the feature C6, as compared with the case where the passage for discharging the game ball is a straight line, the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section with a simple configuration enters the privilege game start entry section. You can lengthen the period until it is determined that you have done so. Further, in the case of having a configuration like the feature C4, by changing the shape, the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry portion according to the fixed time (model of the game machine) is a privilege game start ball. You can easily change the period until you enter the club.

Feature C7. The privilege game start ball entry unit receives a detection signal determined to have entered the privilege game start ball entry unit by the privilege granting means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after entering the second start ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that a detection means (detection sensor 61a) for outputting is provided.

According to the feature C7, the period until it is determined by the privilege giving means that the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section has entered the privilege game start entry section is lengthened by the detection signal. .. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above-mentioned feature C6 while suppressing the mechanical structure from becoming complicated.

Feature C8. It has a variable winning means (variable winning device 59) that is arranged in the game area and enables the winning of the game ball when the first special information or the second special information is the result of the grant correspondence. And
The second starting ball entry portion is provided on a path until the game ball launched from the launching means flows down to the variable winning means, or the game ball that did not enter the variable winning means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, which is provided in the path through which the squirrel flows down.

According to the feature C8, the case where the game ball is launched so as to enter the privilege game start ball entry section (the second start ball entry section) and the case where the first special information or the second special information is given are the result of granting. In this case, it is not necessary to change the method of launching the game ball in the case of launching the game ball so that the game ball is inserted into the variable winning means. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start entry section as a part of the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start ball entry portion is troublesome.

Feature C9. In the game area, a distribution means (passive distribution unit) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area enters the first privilege game start entry unit. 220) The gaming machine according to any one of C1 and C8, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature C9, the game ball launched in the game area is distributed by the distribution means, and a part of the game ball enters the first privilege game start ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball enters the first privilege game start entry section.

Feature C10. The region provided with the sorting means (second region RT) has a guide region (R1) leading to the first privilege game start entry portion and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the game machine has a distribution member (221) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game in the first circumferential direction and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction.

According to the feature C10, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature C11. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature C10, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature C11, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the first privilege game start entry section can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature C12. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 228) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive portion (second accommodating portion 229) that receives the game ball, and has.
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 230, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature C10 or C11, which has a passive distribution member side magnet 224a).

According to the feature C12, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Further, the basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 26 ... 1st frame button, 44 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 56 ... 1st start port, 57 ... Normal 2nd start port, 58 ... Special 2nd start port, 61 ... Variable prize Device start gate, 80 ... symbol display device, 91 ... main control device, 92 ... voice lamp control device, 93 ... display control device, 112 ... MPU (main side MPU), 113 ... ROM (main side ROM), 114 ... RA
M (main RAM), 152 ... MPU (audio side MPU), 153 ... ROM (audio side ROM)
, 154 ... RAM (audio side RAM), 162 ... MPU (display side MPU), 163 ... program ROM, 164 ... work RAM, 165 ... VDP.

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to shift to a privileged gaming state such as a winning gaming state when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. lottery Ru is carried out.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

By the way, in this game machine, it is desirable to increase the interest in the game to Yu technique person.

In view of the above points, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily increasing a player's interest in a game.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 for achieving the above object includes a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launching operation by the player, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means. A first flow path that can flow down, a second flow path that makes it difficult for a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path, and a first starting ball entry portion that allows a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to enter. And the first special information is acquired based on the second start ball entry part where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter and the game ball entering the first start ball entry part. while, the information acquisition unit that the game balls to second start ball entrance section acquires the second specials based upon the ball entrance, the first special information that the information acquisition unit has acquired, and the first 2 specials, and acquiring information storing means capable of storing predetermined number as an upper limit, corresponding to spruce information group in the acquired information the first special information stored in the storage means, and the second special information issuance information and whether the grant decision capable of executing grant determining means are a result of the grant judgment by the grant determining unit, the first special information to be determined, or the second special information the spruce information group and a privilege providing means capable confer benefits the player to the player when it is granted the corresponding result to correspond, the grant determining unit, the first special information in the acquired information storage unit and the first when the second special information is stored together, the second is executable in preference to the grant determination of the grant determining the first specials special information, the second special information the grant more when the corresponding results, the first than the special information is the grant corresponding results are those prone advantageous the benefits game is given to the player, the game balls emitted from said emitting means Has a privilege game start ball entry portion capable of entering a ball, and the privilege granting means enters the game ball into the privilege game start ball entry portion after the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result. As a result, the privilege game can be given, and the privilege game start entry portion is arranged in series with the upper part of the second start entry portion, so that the game ball is placed in the privilege game start entry portion. After entering the ball, the entered game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, and a predetermined number of game balls are launched into the second flow path in the second flow path. Each time, a guiding means capable of guiding the game ball to the privileged game starting ball entry portion is arranged .

According to the game machine according to claim 1, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a first stream in which the game ball launched by the launching means can flow down. The road, the second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, the first starting ball entry portion where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second flow path. The second special information is acquired based on the second starting ball entering portion where the game ball flowing down the road can enter and the game ball entering the first starting ball entering portion, and the second The information acquisition means for acquiring the second special information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry portion, the first special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the second special information are defined. Whether or not the acquired information storage means that can be stored up to a maximum number, the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second special information correspond to the validity information group in the given information. It is assumed that the grant determination means capable of executing the grant determination and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means correspond to the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponding to the pass / fail information group. The grant determination means includes the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege game to the player when it is the result of the grant correspondence, and the grant determination means stores both the first special information and the second special information in the acquired information storage means. If this is the case, the determination of granting the second special information can be executed with priority over the determination of granting the first special information, and the second special information is the result of the grant correspondence. It is easier for the player to be granted the privileged game, which is advantageous to the player, than when the first special information is the result of the granting, and the privileged ball launched from the launching means can be entered. It has a game start ball entry unit, and the privilege granting means performs the privilege game by entering the game ball into the privilege game start ball entry section after the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result. The privilege game start entry portion can be granted, and by arranging the privilege game start entry portion in series with the upper portion of the second start entry portion, after the game ball enters the privilege game start entry portion, The entered game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, and each time a predetermined number of game balls are launched into the second flow path in the second flow path, the privilege game A guide means capable of guiding the game ball to the starting ball entry portion is arranged. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be satisfactorily increased .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electric composition in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a main control device. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a voice lamp control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st hold area. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol winning / failing table storage area, (a) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a low probability mode, and (b) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a high probability mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the distribution table storage area, (a) shows the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the 1st result display part, and (b) is for the 2nd result display part. The distribution table (second distribution information group) is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information executed in the main MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure special electric address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure change executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a round executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a special electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during closing of a special electric power | execution which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power termination processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power control processing which is executed in the main MPU. Fuzu This is a diagram for explaining the Fuden address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main command correspondence processing following FIG. 34. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a figure which shows the opening image displayed on the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the other correspondence processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the passive distribution unit in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution operation of the game ball of the passive distribution unit in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the main control device in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the opening image which is displayed on the symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the arrangement relation of the 2nd start port, the discharge passage, and the 2nd variable winning apparatus start gate in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship of the display mode of the special symbol in 4th Embodiment of this invention, the open lottery mode of an electric accessory, the validity period of the variable winning device start gate, and the game ball. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the main control device in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending information executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the grasp process of the fluctuation display time executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special opening image which is displayed on the symbol display device in 5th Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In each of the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equal to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First Embodiment)
An example of applying the first embodiment of the present invention to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which the main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front of the eleven. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment in the game hall.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. It has 15 doors. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (open / close) with respect to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (other with respect to the rotation center) in front view. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so that it can rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. There is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 is locked so that the game machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the rotation tip side thereof, and the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of putting 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 having a substantially rectangular opening in a substantially central portion. Has been done. A window panel 22 having two colorless and transparent flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front door frame 14, and the front surface (game area) of the game board 43, which will be described later, is the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side of. The window panel 22 may be made of a synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, instead of the flat glass.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 protruding in front of the front door frame 14 below the window portion 21. Are lined up and down. Then, as shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23, and the game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface of the opening is inclined downward toward the right side when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is charged (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to the game ball launching mechanism (launching means) 44 described later.

Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operating means) at a substantially central portion of the upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened), and is in front of the first frame button 26. A second frame button 27 (operating means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated in the symbol display device 80, which will be described later, when the stage (background) to be displayed is changed, the chance-up effect of the reach effect to be displayed, or the effect of the notice character is displayed. To. The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, the amount of light, or the like controlled by the voice lamp control device 92 described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape in the top view, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape in the top view. However, the shapes of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 Can be changed as appropriate.

The stage is a production (background) mode in which the production displayed on the symbol display device 80 is unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the "underwater stage", "beach stage", and "city stage" are used. There are three stages. Then, various productions such as reach production, which will be described later, are set so as to be productions according to the theme corresponding to each stage. Further, the stage can be changed by the player operating the first frame button 26 during a period in which the variable display is not performed and a predetermined period in which the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) described later. This is performed, and each time the first frame button 26 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side of the front view from the second frame button 27. As a result, when the ball lending button 28 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 28 is operated in response to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. As a result, it is possible to standardize a pachinko machine (CR machine) using a card unit and a cash machine.

Inside the lower bulging portion 24, a lower plate 30 is provided which opens upward like the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 provided in the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 operated by the player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 43, which will be described later, is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 30 when viewed from the front. .. Inside the operation handle 31, a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is being touched by the player, and a game ball even in a situation where the player is rotating the operation handle 31. It has a built-in push-button type stop switch 31b for stopping firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electrical resistance. Then, when the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 31 The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the above, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43 described later with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball pulling lever 32 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 30 when discharging the ball stored in the lower plate 30 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower plate 30. The ball pulling lever 32 is normally arranged in the right direction, and by sliding it to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. It is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 32 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

Further, the front door frame 14 is provided with an illumination unit 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED around the window unit 21, and a pair of speaker units 34 are provided at both left and right ends above the window unit 21. It is equipped. In the pachinko machine 10, each illumination unit 33 lights up or blinks at the time of hitting or reaching, to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. By notifying that the player is hitting or reaching, the effect of the effect during the game is enhanced. In addition, the illumination unit 33 also functions as an error lamp that blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 35 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated in the area around the illumination portion 33, is attached.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the central portion of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. The resin base 41 is detachably attached to the game board 43 shown in FIG. 5, and is provided with a game ball launching mechanism 44 for firing the game ball into the front region of the game board 43. The game ball launch mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and the launch rail 45 extending toward the induction rail described later and the game ball stored in the upper plate 25 are placed on the launch rail 45. The ball feeding device 46 is provided with a ball feeding device 46, and a firing solenoid 47, which is an electric actuator that launches a game ball supplied on the launch rail 45 toward the induction rail. Then, by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled, and the game ball is launched.

Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails 51 for ball guidance, a windmill 52, an inner rail 53, an outer rail 54, and a general winning opening on the front surface of a base plate 50 made of a resin material cut into a substantially rectangular shape in the front view. 55, 1st starting port (1st starting ball entry section) 56, 2 2nd starting holes (2nd starting ball entry section) 57, 58, variable winning device (variable winning means) 59, normal symbol starting gate 60, The variable winning device start gate (special game start ball entry section) 61, the variable display device unit 62, and the like are assembled and configured. The general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the second starting opening 57, 58, the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, the variable winning device starting gate 61, the variable display device unit 62, etc. are processed by router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 50, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 43 by a wood screw or the like. In the present embodiment, two second starting ports 57 and 58 are assembled to the game board 43, and when the second starting port 57 and the second starting port 58 are clearly distinguished, the second starting port 57 is used. A second starting port 57 is usually used, and the second starting port 58 is referred to as a special second starting port 58. The peripheral portion of such a game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the central portion of the front surface can be visually recognized via the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14. There is.

Further, the game board 43 has a general winning opening 55, a first starting opening 56, a normal second starting opening 57, a special second starting opening 58, a variable winning device 59, a normal symbol starting gate 60, and a variable winning device starting gate 61. Detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a (see FIG. 9) are provided corresponding to each of the above. Then, a ball enters the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, and the variable winning device starting gate 61. Then, the ball entering is detected by the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. As the detection sensor, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as it can individually detect the entry of a game ball.

Further, when the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, and the variable winning device 59 is detected, based on the detection result. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 55, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 59, 15 game balls are paid out. When the payout is executed and the ball enters the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the payout of three game balls is executed. There is. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls for entering the first starting port 56 is larger than the number of prize balls for entering the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. May be increased. Further, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 59 is not limited to a configuration larger than the number of other prize balls. For example, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 59 is the general winning opening 55. The number of prize balls may be less than the number of prize balls for entering the ball.

The inner rail 53 and the outer rail 54 are formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and the inner rail 53 and the outer rail 54 form a guide rail and a game ball launching mechanism. The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, a resin connecting member 63 that connects the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 53 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 54 is arranged in front view. There is. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 53, the outer rail 54, and the connecting member 63, and is an area in which the game is played according to the behavior of the game ball (launched game ball). The area where is flowing down).

A return ball prevention member 64 is attached to the tip side of the inner rail 53 (upper left portion in FIG. 5), and the game ball once launched to the upper part (game area) of the game board 43 is guided by the guide rail (inner rail 53). It is possible to suppress the return to the inside (the area between the outer rail 54 and the outer rail 54). A return rubber 65 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 54 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 65. , The momentum is being dampened and bounced back toward the center.

The first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, and the special second starting port 58 allow a game ball to enter, and the first starting port 56 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 43 in the front view. Normally, the second starting port 57 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 43 in front view (right side of the first starting port 56), and the special second starting port 58 is arranged on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43. Has been done. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 56, the corresponding detection sensor 56a (see FIG. 9) detects the entry of the game ball. Similarly, when a game ball normally enters the second starting port 57, the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 9) detects the entry of the game ball, and when the game ball enters the special second starting port 58. , The corresponding detection sensor 58a (see FIG. 9) detects the entry of the game ball. Then, each detection result is output to the main control device 91, which will be described later, and the main control device 91 determines whether or not the special symbol hits (determines whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode). The display according to the lottery result is shown on the symbol display device 80 described later.

Further, normally, the second starting port 57 is provided with an electric accessory 66. The electric accessory 66 is configured to be openable and closable, and when the electric accessory 66 is in the closed state, the game ball normally does not enter the second starting port 57 or is difficult to enter. When the electric accessory 66 is in the open state, the game ball is usually in a state in which it is easy to enter the second starting port 57.

The normal symbol start gate (through gate) 60 is provided on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43 and below the special second start port 58. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60, the passage (entry ball) of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 60a (see FIG. 9), and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. Will be done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60, the main control device 91, which will be described later, determines whether or not the normal symbol hits (determines whether or not the electric accessory 66 is opened). Then, when the determination result is a hit (winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory drive unit 66a (see FIG. 9) is driven to open the electric accessory 66. Therefore, the game ball is usually in a state where it is easy to enter the second starting port 57.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 66 is more likely to be in the open state due to an increase in the probability of hitting the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 66 than the high frequency support mode. Is equipped with a low-frequency support mode that is unlikely to be open. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 60 to open the electric accessory 66, so that the game ball is viewed from the front of the symbol display device 80. Fire the game ball so that it passes on the right side (so-called right-handed).

The variable winning device 59 is arranged on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 43, and has a large winning opening 59a leading to the back side of the game board 43, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 59b covering the large winning opening 59a, and the like. It is configured to have a variable winning drive unit 59d (see FIG. 9) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 59b forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate 59b. The large winning opening 59a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Then, when it is determined that the main control device 91, which will be described later, has won the transition to the open / close execution mode (wins the winning lottery), it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61. Then, the variable winning drive unit 59d is driven and the opening / closing plate 59b is tilted downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening 59a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state. For example, the normally closed large winning opening 59a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls are inserted). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 59 is determined by the determined hit type, and for example, in the case of the 16R hit result described later, the opening / closing operation is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is given to the player as a game value (game value). The payout will be made. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 and enters the grand prize opening 59a (so-called right-handed strike). ). The opening / closing execution mode is a lottery game (first lottery game) triggered by a prize in the first starting port 56 in the main control device 91, which will be described later, or a winning in the normal second starting port 57. It is a mode that shifts when the lottery is won to determine whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode of the lottery game to be performed and the lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by winning the special second starting port 58. This open / close execution mode will be described later.

The variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43 and directly above the special second start port 58. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always enters the special second starting port 58. .. Then, when the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61, the passage (entry) of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 61a (see FIG. 9), and the detection result is for the main control device 91 described later. It is output. When the main control device 91 determines that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been won (the winning lottery has been won), and determines that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61, as described above. Drives the variable winning drive unit 59d. When the main control device 91 determines that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been won, the main control device 91 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61, but the variable winning device starting gate 61 is used for the game. The determination of whether or not the ball has passed is executed after the fixed time described later has elapsed. In other words, it can be said that the variable winning device start gate 61 becomes effective after the main control device 91 determines that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been won, and after the fixed time has elapsed.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the main control device 91 has won the transition to the open / close execution mode (winning the winning lottery), the open / close execution mode starts immediately (automatically) after the fixed time has elapsed. After determining that the main control device 91 has won the transition to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 91 sets the variable winning device start gate 61 to the game ball after a fixed time has elapsed. The open / close execution mode is started when it is determined that has passed.

Further, as described above, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always enters the special second starting port 58. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed (when the opening / closing execution mode is started), a lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by a game ball entering the special second starting port 58 is always performed. It will be in a pending state.

The special second starting port 58 is arranged so that only the game balls that have passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 can enter. That is, the special second starting port 58 is arranged so that a game ball that has not passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 does not enter.

Further, as described above, the nail 51, the windmill 52, and the like are arranged on the game board 43, and the nail 51, the windmill 52, and the like are launched by the player toward the first starting port 56. The probability that the game ball launched by the player toward the special second starting port 58 will enter the special second starting port 58 is lower than the probability that the ball will enter the first starting port 56. In addition, the path through which the game ball flows down to the first starting port 56 and the path through which the game ball flows down to the special second starting port 58 are appropriately provided.
Although not particularly limited, in the nail 51, the windmill 52, etc., the game ball launched by the player toward the first start port 56 enters at about 1/15, and the player makes a special second start. It is arranged on the game board 43 so that the game ball fired toward the mouth 58 enters at about 1/30. That is, when the player is not in the high-frequency support mode, the player who fires the game ball toward the first start port 56 executes opening and closing more than when the game ball is fired toward the special second start port 58. You can get a lot of chances to win a lottery to decide whether to switch to the mode.

A plurality of general winning openings 55 are provided below the front view of the game board 43. In addition, an out port 67 is provided at the lowermost part of the front view of the game board 43, so that game balls that have not entered the various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 67. ..

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not. In this specification, the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, and the variable winning device 59 (large winning opening 59a). The ball (the game ball is detected by the detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c) is also expressed as a prize.

A sticking space 70 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space 70 is a front door frame. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of 14.

Further, a main display unit 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided in the lower left corner portion (outside of the outer rail 54) of the game board 43 in front view. The main display unit 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window unit 21 of the front door frame 14.

The main display unit 71 is a first result display unit 71a showing the result of the first lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning of the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, and the special second. The second result display unit 71b showing the result of the second lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning of the starting port 58 wins a lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode. As a result, when the variable winning device 59 is in the open / close execution mode (or in the open / close execution mode), it has a round display unit 71c indicating the number of times the variable winning device 59 in the open / close execution mode is opened. There is.

Specifically, the first result display unit 71a performs a variable display regarding the first lottery game, and the variable display (blinks) until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game elapses. After the display), as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the first lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 71a and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the second result display unit 71b, the variation display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variation display (blinking display) is performed until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. After that, as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the second lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 71b and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the corresponding first and second results are based on the first and second lottery games (winning of any of the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58). The variation display is started on the display units 71a and 71b, and the period until the predetermined stop result is displayed and the variation display is stopped corresponds to one game (variation display). However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed in, the variation display is started in the single result display unit, and the period until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is regarded as one game. To do.

Further, the main display unit 71 has other display units 71d in addition to the first and second result display units 71a and 71b and the round display unit 71c. In the other display unit 71d, for example, a variable display is performed triggered by a prize in the normal symbol start gate 60, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the prize in the normal symbol start gate 60 is performed. The results are shown. Then, if the result of the internal lottery triggered by the winning of the normal symbol start gate 60 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state, the other display unit 71d displays a predetermined stop result. After the lighting is displayed, the state shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 66 is in the open state, and the game ball is usually in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 57.

Further, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60 while the other display unit 71d is performing the variable display triggered by winning the normal symbol start gate 60, the maximum number of passages is 4 in this embodiment. It is held up to the number of times, and the number of holds is also displayed. Further, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58 while the variable display is being performed on the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b. Then, in the present embodiment, the number of winnings is held up to 4 times for the first starting port 56 and up to 4 times for the second starting ports 57 and 58, and the number of holdings is also displayed.

The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the number of LEDs is small depending on the combination of the emission colors. It is possible to suggest various game states of. Further, the main display unit 71 may be configured by using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The variable display device unit 62 is arranged in the center of the game board 43. The variable display device unit 62 changes and displays the first special symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first result display unit 71a to display the lottery result of the first lottery game, and also changes on the second result display unit 71b. A symbol display device 80 having a display screen 80a for displaying the lottery result of the second lottery game by varyingly displaying the second special symbol while synchronizing with the display, and a center frame 81 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 80. have.

The center frame 81 is installed with its upper portion extending in front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .. Further, since the symbol display device 80 is arranged in the center of the game board 43 and the center frame 81 is installed in a state of extending forward, the game ball fired by the player is the symbol display device 80. It passes through the left side of the front view or the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 and flows down. In the following, among the regions where the game ball flows down, the region on the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 will be referred to as the first region RS, and the region on the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 will be referred to as the second region RT. It can be said that the special second starting port 58 and the variable winning device starting gate 61 are arranged in the second region RT. Further, in the following, launching the game ball so as to flow down the first region RS is also referred to as left-handed, and launching the game ball so as to flow down the second region RT is also referred to as right-handed.

The design display device 80 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display having a substantially rectangular shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by the winning of the first starting port 56, and the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 The upper display area Dm on the upper side that displays the second special symbol showing the judgment result of the second lottery game triggered by winning a prize, and the lower side that displays the reserved symbols (holding of the first lottery game and the second lottery game). It has a lower display area Dn on the side.

In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by the display control device 93 described later. Further, the symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT.

In the pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is arranged so that the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variablely displayed. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started when a prize is won in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58. That is, when the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b performs the variable display, the symbol display device 80 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 80 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on the preset effective line.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine types of main symbols with the numbers "1" to "9" shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (i), respectively. And, it is composed of a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture shown in FIG. 7 (j). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of nine types of character symbols such as an octopus to which numbers "1" to "9" are added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row are set in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is the main. The symbols and sub-symbols are arranged in a cyclic manner in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and between each main symbol. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are each composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and then the main symbol of "9" is arranged. The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged between the main symbol of "1" and the main symbol of "1", and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, in the upper display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

Then, when an effect for game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm triggered by winning a prize in the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the effect is performed. The variable display is started so that the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the production for the game round ends, if the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines, and the open / close execution mode is formed. The hit video is displayed as a transition to (occurrence of hit result).

As described above, the symbol display device 80 (first result display unit 71a or) is triggered by winning any of the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58. The second result display unit 71b) starts the variation display, displays a predetermined stop result, and stops the variation display, which corresponds to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 7, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

The lower display area Dn is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. The lower display area Dn has a first reserved symbol display area Ds on the left side of the front view and a second reserved symbol display area Dt on the right side of the front view, and has a first reserved symbol display area Ds and a second reserved symbol. It has an execution pending symbol display area Du between it and the display area Dt. The first reserved symbol display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 56, and in this pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the first starting port 56 is held up to four times. Since it is configured as such, it is equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of four small areas. The second hold symbol display area Dt is an area for displaying the number of holds triggered by winning a prize in the normal second start port 57 or the special second start port 58, and in the pachinko machine 10, the normal second start port 57 is normally displayed. Or, because the special second starting port 58 is held up to four times (normally, the second starting port 57 and the special second starting port 58 are held up to four times in total). The four small areas are equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4. The execution pending symbol display area Du is an area for displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the game times variablely displayed on the symbol display device 80.

Then, in the upper display area Dm, when the game ball wins the first starting port 56 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the first lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower In the first reserved symbol display area Ds of the side display area Dn, the display area (center side display area) having the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in which the reserved symbols are not displayed is the first. 1 The reserved symbol of the lottery game is displayed. Similarly, if a game ball wins in the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the second lottery game triggered by the winning is started. In the second reserved symbol display area Dt of the lower display area Dn, which is reserved and the reserved symbol is not displayed, the display area having the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 (the display area on the center side). ), The reserved symbol of the second lottery game is displayed.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), a main control device 91 that controls the main control of the game and a voice lamp control device that controls the voice, the lamp display, and the like. The 92 and the display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box has a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base, and these box bases and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box joint as a (bonding means). Since the substrate boxes are inseparably connected by these box joints, the substrate box needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box is opened. In addition, for example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box can be formed by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the cover. The joining process by the box joining part prevents illegal opening after the joining, and even if illegal opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily, and once. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. Then, when the board box is opened when a defect occurs in the housed control board or when the control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box connecting portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion or the like. , Cut the connecting part between the box joint and the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box and the box cover are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw may be inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion. If the history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it is possible to easily find out whether or not the board box has been opened illegally by looking at the board box.

Further, a plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting bases of the respective control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are provided by the coupling pieces and the coupling pieces. The combination process is performed with and.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 8, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 91, the display control device 93, and the voice lamp control device 92. There is. The back pack unit 15 includes a transparent back pack 94, and a payout mechanism portion 95 and a control device collecting unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

The payout mechanism unit 95 includes a tank 97 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 connected below the tank 97 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail. A payout device 99 is provided at the most downstream portion of the 98 and pays out balls according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 9). Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 99 is discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. A vibrator (not shown) for adding vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98.
Further, the payout mechanism unit 95 is equipped with, for example, a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control device collective unit 96 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99 and various control devices, and the player. It is provided with a power supply and a launch control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the operation handle 31 by the user. The payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 8, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and emission control device 101 are provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. There is. The state return switch 102 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 9). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The payout control device 100, the power supply, and the launch control device 101 are configured by accommodating a control board or the like in a board box in the same manner as the above-mentioned control devices, and are provided with the same fraud deterrent means as described above. .. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at an upper corner portion on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal plate 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the tank 97 or the like runs out of game balls, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for signal output each time the door frame 14 is rented, output terminal for signal output when the game machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened, and state transition such as opening / closing execution mode At that time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal or the like for outputting a signal is provided. Then, a signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine. In addition, each control device (each control board) has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and a random number generator used in various lottery, which will be described later. A device, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 9 to 11 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 9 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 10 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91, and FIG. 11 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91. The configuration of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 is shown. In FIG. 11, the supply lines of the operating power from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 are indicated by double-line arrows, and the other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid line arrows. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. In the following, the MPU 112, ROM 113, and RAM 114 of the main control device 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

The main ROM 113 is configured to use a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a and the distribution table are stored. Storage area 113b, Reach table storage area 113c, Variable display time table storage area 113d, Stop result table storage area 113e, Normal symbol hit / fail table storage area 113f, Special figure special electric address table storage area 113g, Normal figure general electric address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

The main RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. Then, the main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 is, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electric counter area 114d, a special symbol special electric timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, time saving flag storage area 114g, time saving number counter area 114h, Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i, Fuzu Fuden timer counter area 114j, various hit result flag storage area 114k, other various counter areas 114m, other various flag storage areas It has 114n.

In addition to the above elements, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a one-chip configuration in which the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114 are built-in, and the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. It may be a configured configuration. This also applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown), respectively. An input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the configuration may be such that the input port and the output port can be switched as needed. This also applies to the MPU of each control device described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main MPU 112, and various detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a, 115 and various drive units 59d. , 66a, and the main display unit 71 are connected. First, the connection configurations with the various detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a, 115, the various drive units 59d, 66a, and the main display unit 71 will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

On the input side of the main MPU 112, there are a general winning opening 55, a first starting opening 56, a normal second starting opening 57, a special second starting opening 58, a variable winning device 59, and a normal symbol starting gate 60, which are variable. The winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a provided for the winning device start gate 61 (hereinafter, these are collectively won detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, (Also referred to as 60a and 61a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a may be connected to each other via one electrical wiring, and may be connected in the middle of each signal path. The configuration may include a relay board. This also applies to the configuration related to the connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, and 61a through the winning IC 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and each winning unit is based on the reception result. Winning judgment (ball winning judgment) is performed. Further, in the main MPU 112, a first lottery game triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 56 and a second lottery game triggered by winning a prize in the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 are performed. At the same time, the electric accessory opening lottery (support lottery) is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol start gate 60.

The winning IC 116 is a route abnormality confirmation means or a route abnormality confirmation circuit, and is used by the winning IC 116 between the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a and the main MPU 112. Check if the signal is being transmitted normally.

Further, on the input side of the main MPU 112, in addition to the above-mentioned winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor It is electrically connected via electrical wiring. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines the presence or absence of an abnormality targeted for each detection. judge.

On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable winning drive unit 59d for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 59b of the variable winning device 59 and an electric accessory driving unit 66a for opening / closing the electric accessory 66 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. It is connected. Further, the main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the main MPU 112 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 59d and the electric accessory drive unit 66a through the driver circuit, and displays the main display unit 71. Take control.

For example, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 59d is executed on the main MPU 112 so that the large winning opening 59a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 66 is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 66a is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the electric accessory 66 is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display units 71 (first and second result display units 71a, 71b) is executed on the main MPU 112. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 66 is shown, the display control of the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is executed on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 sets information in the main RAM 114 according to the progress of the game. Although omitted in FIG. 9, an external output terminal plate 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 signals according to the information set in the main RAM 114. The output setting is made to the external output terminal plate 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer in the game hall.

Next, the configuration in the connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before explaining the configuration in these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control device 100 will be described.

The payout control device 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 99, the payout control board 121 is equipped with an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 has a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. .. In the following, the MPU 122, ROM 123 and RAM 124 provided in the payout control device 100 will be referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123 and the payout side RAM 124.

The payout side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side MPU 122.

The payout side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 123. Then, the payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123 is executed. In addition to the above elements, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 is blocked from flowing down to the downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sent out to the downstream side. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stop member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting a game ball sent to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring. Has been done. The payout side MPU 122 supplies a drive signal to the payout motor 99a via a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121 to execute the payout of the game ball, and pays out based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Grasp the number of game balls that have been released.

Further, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 provided on the back pack unit 15 via electrical wiring, and the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 is electrically connected via electrical wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. As a result, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by appropriately manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10. The payout side MPU 122 executes the ball lending control by transmitting and receiving an electric signal to and from the card unit.

Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, a fullness detection sensor (not shown) that detects whether the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball tray is electrically connected to the payout side MPU 122. In addition, a ballless detection sensor (not shown) or the like that detects whether the tank 97 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

Then, the payout side MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on the communication with the main side MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

For details on the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms that the prize ball has been won in the prize unit corresponding to the generation of the prize ball based on the detection results of the prize detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, the payout side MPU 122 is notified. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted to the player, and a first signal path SL1 is provided to transmit the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

There are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 55 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 59 is specified, 15 are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning of the first and second starting ports 56, 57, 58 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is issued. It is output.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication in communicating the prize ball command. That is, the information of the plurality of bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

Further, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout status commands include a prize ball completion command indicating that the prize ball has been completed and the number of completed prize balls, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in paying out the game ball, and the predetermined value. It contains an abnormal termination command that indicates that the error has been cleared. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of its own command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as a plurality of bits of information. The predetermined abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a ball-less state of the tank 97.

In communicating the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, the configuration is such that the information of the plurality of bits included in the payout status command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112 in order for the main side MPU 112 to grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

The payout permission signal consists of 1-bit information. When the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, the LOW level signal is transmitted, and when the output of the prize ball command is permitted, the HI level signal is transmitted. To. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and the LOW level signal is output when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. It may be configured to be.

The third signal path SL3 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

In this way, the command communication between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is serial communication instead of parallel communication, so that the electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 can be used. On the other hand, even if a fraudulent act using a so-called hanging board for connecting an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden by electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted as the target of the above action. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned illegal boards are used. It is easy to hide due to electrical wiring. On the other hand, since the command communication is performed by serial communication, it becomes difficult for the illegal board to be hidden in the electrical wiring, and it becomes easy to find the board if it is temporarily installed.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

The power supply and launch control device 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100. A power supply circuit 142 having the power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power supply unit 143 for power-on and a power supply unit 144 for power failure.

The power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, or the like is based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. The required operating voltage is generated for each, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As an outline, the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply takes in the AC 24 volt power supply supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15, and has a + 12 V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, and the like. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the main control device 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 at an intermediate position of the power supply path between the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on and the main MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply. Then, when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power failure signal) to the main MPU 112 is assumed to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that the power cutoff has occurred. ..
The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply unit 144 for power failure is composed of a capacitor, and when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. It will be charged. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply unit 144 is discharged from the power supply unit 144. As a result, storage retention power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and retained without being erased while the storage and holding power is being supplied from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure.

The capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). ..
Further, the configuration of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 144 for power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Further, although the description by illustration is omitted, the power supply and the emission control board 141 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 144 for power failure. In the power supply and emission control board 141, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, it is controlled for a sufficient time for executing the power failure processing by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the system, at a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

Here, a configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 will be described.

The electric power from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is supplied to the VCS terminal of the main MPU 112 and the VCS terminal of the payout side MPU 122. In a situation where power is supplied from a commercial power source by the power supplied to the VCS terminal, various control processes are executed by the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held by the RAMs 114 and 124. Will be.

On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112, but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout side MPU 122. That is, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but not to the payout side RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores and holds the information, but the payout side RAM 124 does not store and hold the information. The VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or is not connected to any electrical wiring.

As described above, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but the capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is reduced by configuring the configuration so that it is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124. Is planned. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 that controls the launch of the game ball. The launch control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the conditions, a launch permission receiving circuit 147, and a launch IC 148.

The condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal of a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a that detects that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is touched by the player, and the game even in a situation where the handle portion is rotated. A stop switch 31b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the ball, is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121, and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131.

The transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the condition receives a signal from the touch sensor 31a indicating that the handle portion is being touched by the player, and also receives a signal from the stop switch 31b indicating that the player is not manually operated. Further, when a signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, an HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The firing permission receiving circuit 147 is HI-level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112, provided that the HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to a launch permission) and, when receiving the launch permission signal, continuously supplying a signal corresponding to the signal to the launch IC 148. When the main MPU 112 does not receive the HI level condition satisfying signal from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146, the main side MPU 112 transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to the firing permission), but fires. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main MPU 112 newly starts transmitting the HI level launch permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed, the HI level Ends the transmission of the launch permission signal.

When the launch IC 148 receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is for each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feed device 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis.
In this case, the launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the launch solenoid 47 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch rail 45.

Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the firing IC 148 is based on the voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. Therefore, the larger the operation amount of the operation handle 31, the stronger the firing strength of the game ball by the firing solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

The voice lamp control device 92 includes a voice lamp control board 151, the voice lamp control board 151 is equipped with an MPU 152, and the MPU 152 has a ROM 153 and a RAM 154 built-in. In the following, the MPU 152, ROM 153 and RAM 154 provided in the voice lamp control device 92 will be described as the voice side MPU 152, the voice side ROM 153 and the voice side RAM 154.

The audio side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The audio side ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the audio side MPU 152, and has, for example, various data table storage areas 153a, command information storage area 153b, and the like.

The various data table storage areas 153a are areas in which light emission data, voice data, and the like are stored. The command information storage area 153b is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice side MPU 152 is stored.

The audio side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the audio side ROM 153. Then, the voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The voice side RAM 154 has, for example, a command storage area 154a, a holding data area 154b, various counter areas 154c, and the like.

The command storage area 154a is an area for storing commands received from the main MPU 112. The retained data area 154b is data that is temporarily used to execute the effect and the notification during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the voice side MPU 152 even after the effect and the notification are started. It is an area for storing and holding data for making it available independently. The various counter areas 154c are areas in which game counters and the like are stored.

Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (variation command, type command, fixed stop command, opening command, ending command, hold command, etc., which will be described later), the game times and open / close execution mode Decide the content of the production to be executed in the above. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to control the light emission of the illumination unit 33, and the sound output device 156 is controlled to control the sound of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Do.

A first frame button detection sensor 26a for detecting the operation of the first frame button 26 and a second frame button detection sensor 27a for detecting the operation of the second frame button 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. ing. Then, the voice side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, and when the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, the processing corresponding to the operation is executed. To do.

Further, the voice side MPU 152 identifies whether or not it is necessary to perform notification based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and voice control of the voice output device 156. Notify.

The various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later, but these various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. In addition, various commands are configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information on the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

Further, the audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93, and transmits various commands including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. For various commands output from the voice side MPU 152, the command information storage area 153b of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 91 without going through the voice lamp control device 92, and the voice lamp control device is related to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side in the communication direction from 92.

The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, the display control board 161 has an MPU 162 mounted therein, and the MPU 162 has a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 built therein. Further, the display control board 161 contains a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. In the following, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display side MPU 162.

The program ROM 163 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the display side MPU 162. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when transmitting a command to the VDP 165, each effect. It has a data table storage area 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access as well as being capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. Then, the work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a.

Then, the display side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the voice lamp control device 92, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 165). To carry out.

The VDP165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP165 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc. to intervene in reading and writing the data, and reads the image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores the image data in the video RAM 167 according to the image data. The image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

The character ROM 166 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. Further, as a part of the above data, the character ROM 166 has image data to be displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds, the second reserved symbol display area Dt, and the execution reserved symbol display area Du of the symbol display device 80. The hold image data storage area 166a in which the image data is stored is set.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and share the image data and the like in each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 in the character ROM 166.

The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 167.

Further, the video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a. Then, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the first reserved symbol display area Ds in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RE1 to RE4 are set. Further, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of the second reserved symbol display area Dt in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RF1 to RF4 are set. Further, in the reserved symbol display area 167a, an execution unit area RG is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the execution pending symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80. Then, in each of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du, images corresponding to the data written in the respective unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG in the reserved symbol display area 167a are displayed. To. If no data is set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG (when data meaning a blank is set), the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG are set. In each of the display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du corresponding to the above, no image is displayed, or the background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are exchanged between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 by bidirectional communication. Specifically, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the first signal line group 170, and the first signal line group 170 is used to display from the voice side MPU 152. A command is sent to the side MPU 162. This command transmission is performed by serial communication, and the first signal line group 170 identifies the signal line 171 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 172 for a clock signal for performing the above and a signal line 173 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

Further, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the second signal line group 180, and the display side MPU 162 is connected to the voice side MPU 152 by using the second signal line group 180. The command is sent to. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 180 includes a signal line 181 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 182 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 182 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

The first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one end of the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 is aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector is an audio lamp control device. It is detachably attached to the connector of 92, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 93.

The communication method between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Further, the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like.

The main MPU 112 uses various counter information during a game to draw a lottery for whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a winning lottery), set the display of the main display unit 71, and display the symbol 80. Set the symbol display of. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, a winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery and a winning type counter used for determining the type (winning type) of the opening / closing execution mode when the winning lottery is won. C2, reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 80 deviates and fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of hit random number counter C1, main display unit 71, and symbol display. The fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in the device 80, the electric accessory open random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 66 is in the electric accessory open state, and the electric accessory open random number counter. A random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of C4 is used. A part of each counter is updated at intervals of 4 msec, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 16) described later. The updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. Then, a predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58 is a special symbol in the main RAM 114. A predetermined value stored in the hold ball storage area 114b sequentially and stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60 is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114. Will be done. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114.

Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c will be described.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 114b includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA having the first to fourth holding areas RA1 to RA4 and the first special symbol holding number storage area NA, and the first to fourth holding areas RB1. It has a second special symbol holding ball storage area RB having ~ RB4 and a second special symbol holding number storage area NB, a total holding number storage area NX, and one execution area RC. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of a first holding area RA1 in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA. The configurations of the second to fourth reserved areas RA2 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB, and the execution area RC are , The same as in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4, RB1 to RB4, and the execution area RC include a hit random number counter storage area 201, a hit type counter storage area 202, a reach random number counter storage area 203, and an execution area RC. It has a winning start opening storage area 204. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting port 56. , And each value of the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203, and the first start port. The winning information for 56 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 204. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the first starting port 56, the first reserved area RA1 → the second reserved area RA2 → the third reserved area RA3 → the fourth reserved area RA4, respectively. Numerical information etc. are stored in chronological order. In this way, by providing the four holding areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA, the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 56 is stored up to a maximum of four as a whole. (Hold memory).

Similarly, in the first to fourth holding areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB, the winning history of the game ball to the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 is set to the same. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is placed in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203. At the same time, the winning information for the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 is stored in the winning starting port storage area 204. In the present embodiment, the winning information for the second starting port is stored in the winning starting port storage area 204, but the information for distinguishing the second starting port 57 from the special second starting port 58 is stored. Not done. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the second starting port 57 or the special second starting opening 58, the first holding area RB1 → the second holding area RB2 → the third holding area RB3 → Each numerical information and the like are stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth reserved area RB4. As described above, since the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is provided with the four holding areas RB1 to RB4, the winning history of the game balls to the second starting ports 57 and 58 is a maximum of four as a whole. Is memorized (held memorized).

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, since the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 56 and the second starting ports 57 and 58 is stored up to 4 respectively, up to 8 pieces are stored on hold as a whole. To. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (3 game balls in this embodiment) are not acquired. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the total number of items that can be stored on hold is set to 8, but the total number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to 8, and is arbitrary, such as 4, 6, or. There may be other plurals such as 9 or more. Further, the number that can be stored and stored may be different between the first starting port 56 and the second starting ports 57 and 58.

When the execution area RC starts the variable display of the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b), each value stored in the first reserved area RA1 or the first reserved area RB1. This is an area for moving the player, and at the start of one game round, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RC.

In addition, the first special symbol holding number storage area NA provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is the holding number of the first lottery game (holding the variable display triggered by the winning of the first starting port 56). It is an area to store the number). Similarly, the second special symbol reservation number storage area NB provided in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area RB has the number of reservations for the second lottery game (usually to the second start port 57 or the special second start port 58). This is an area for storing the number of pending changes in the variable display triggered by a prize.
The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the sum number (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c is the value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) according to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 60. This is a hold area for storing in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 12, the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 114c is composed of four storage areas of the first to fourth holding areas RD1 to RD4, an execution area RD5, and a holding number storage area NC. Then, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 60 are stored (reserved storage) by the four storage areas of the first to fourth reserved areas RD1 to RD4.

Specifically, when the normal symbol start gate 60 is continuously won, the electric accessory is opened in the order of the first holding area RD1 → the second holding area RD2 → the third holding area RD3 → the fourth holding area RD4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the normal symbol start gate 60 can be stored.

The execution area RD5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first hold area RD1. Then, when the open lottery of the electric accessory 66 is performed, a winning / failing determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RD5.

Even in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, the number that can be held and stored is not limited to 4, but is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. It may be singular.

Returning to the explanation of the counter, various counters will be described in detail.

The hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Then, especially when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and counting is started again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58, the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 Stored in.

The value of the random number that wins the winning lottery is stored as a special symbol winning / failing table (winning / noting information group in the given information) in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a as the winning / failing information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Here, the contents of the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. 14A and 14B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the special symbol winning / failing table in the present embodiment, FIG. 14A shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 14B shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

As shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol winning / failing table includes the special symbol winning / failing table (low-probability winning / failing information group) for the low-probability mode of FIG. 14 (a) and the high-probability mode of FIG. 14 (b). The special symbol winning / failing table (high-probability winning / failing information group) is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a low probability mode (low probability corresponding state) and a high probability mode (high probability corresponding state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 14A, the value of the random number winning the winning lottery ( That is, the number of winning information) is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 14B, the value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (that is, winning). Information) is said to be 21 pieces. Further, in the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability mode is the winning random number that wins the winning lottery in the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of the counter C1. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 Stored in.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the given information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as the distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 113. 15A and 15B are diagrams for explaining a distribution table, in which FIG. 15A is a distribution table for the first result display unit (first distribution information group), and FIG. 15B is for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (second distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 56. Further, the distribution table for the second result display unit is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second start port 57 or the special second start port 58. It is a table.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), as the distribution destination of the game result, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" Corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, "10 to 23" corresponds to the 4R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 4R normal hit result.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 15B, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0" is used as the distribution destination of the game result. "~ 23" corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R normal hit result.

Here, the probability variation hit result in the present embodiment is a hit result in which the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, the normal winning result is a winning result in which the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode (maintained) and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high frequency support mode in the normal hit result ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (100 times in this embodiment) after the transition, and shifts to the low frequency support mode.

As will be described in detail later, the high frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 66 is easy to open, and the low frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 66 is difficult to open.

Further, in the control of the variable winning device 59 in the open / close execution mode, a round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times. The round game continues until either the predetermined opening duration elapses or the predetermined maximum number of game balls wins the large winning opening 59a. It's a game. For example, the opening duration is set to 30 sec, and the upper limit is set to 10.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. Then, in each round game, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the maximum number of winning balls in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it is expected that a maximum number of prizes will be generated in one round game for the large winning opening 59a.

Here, the various hit results described with reference to FIG. 15 will be described. The "4R probability variation hit result and 4R normal hit result" are game results in which the large winning opening 59a is opened four times, and the "16R probability variation hit result". And 16R normal hit result ”is a game result in which the big winning opening 59a is opened 16 times.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when the winning lottery is won is the case where the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 56 as an opportunity, and the normal first. It is different from the case where the lottery is won by winning a prize in the 2 starting port 57 or the special 2nd starting port 58. Specifically, the probability of winning a 16R probability variation when winning the first starting port 56 is usually a winning 16R probability variation when winning the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. It is lower than the probability. The 16R probability variation hit result can be said to be the most advantageous hit result because the large winning opening 59a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode. That is, the probability that the player can get a large number of balls is higher when the lottery is won by winning the prize in the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. In addition, the case where the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 56 and the case of winning the winning lottery with the winning of the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 are normal. The probabilities of winning results are equal, but the number of rounds for normal winning results is different. Specifically, if the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 56 as an opportunity, the result will be a 4R normal winning result, and the winning of the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 will be the trigger. If you win the lottery, you will get a 16R normal hit result. That is, even if the result is a normal hit, the player will get more balls if the winning lottery is won with the winning of the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58. You can get it.

In addition, the "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a subsequent winning lottery is increased as an added value after the end of winning, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution mode). It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to the privilege game). The "low probability mode" refers to a case where the mode is not high probability mode (when the probability change is not in progress), and means a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is lower than in the case of the probability change. ..

Further, as a support mode in the electric accessory 66, the electric accessory 66 is in an open state per unit time when compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. A high frequency support mode (high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency is relatively high and low.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric accessory open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the high-frequency support is provided. The mode has a higher probability of winning the electric accessory open state than the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the electric accessory open state is won, the electric accessory 66 is opened more often in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory release state is won. It is set, and one opening time is set longer. In this case, the electric accessory is opened in the high-frequency support mode, and when the electric accessory 66 is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 66 is opened so that the game ball can easily win the second starting port 57, and the game ball usually wins the second starting port 57. Since the number of game balls is paid out, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much.

The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is set to the electric accessory open state per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, the electric accessory is open. The probability of winning the electric accessory open state in the lottery may be equalized, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be appropriately set, and can be changed as appropriate.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 Stored in. Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game times (the game times in which the winning lottery is won) that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main MPU 112 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and is a stop display result after the variable display in a game in which the variable winning device 59 is in the open / close execution mode. In a game machine in which is a special display result, a variation that tends to be a special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a display state.

Specifically, the reach display is a hit (open / close execution mode) by stopping and displaying some of the symbol strings among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a display state that displays the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may establish the combination of hit symbols corresponding to (shift to), and in that state, displays the fluctuation of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows. is there.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be used, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence. ..

More specifically, with reference to FIG. 6, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the variation display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. In, the main symbol having the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, or the number "3" in the upper symbol row Z1 and the number "1" in the lower symbol row Z3 of the effective line L2 is stopped and displayed. By doing so, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variation display of the symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row) in the middle row, so that the reach display is obtained. Then, when the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The fluctuation display of is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 80a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS has a variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) and a variation display time (display duration) of the symbol in the symbol display device 80. ) Is used to determine in the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 71 and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 80. Then, when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. ..

The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Then, when the electric accessory open random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the count is counted again from the initial value. It will be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 60.

The value of the random number that wins the normal symbol is stored as the normal symbol win / loss table (win / fail information group) in the normal symbol win / fail table storage area 113f as the win / loss information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values for winning a normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is "5 to 28". Further, in the high probability mode, it is set to 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the low probability mode, when the value of the acquired electric accessory release random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined to be a winner, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric accessory release random number counter If the value of C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined to be a winner. Then, a predetermined lighting state is indicated on the other display unit 71d of the main display unit 71, and the electric accessory 66 is opened.

<About various processes executed by MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, the main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the power is turned on to the main control device 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait processing, the wait processing (for example, peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) is waited for the sub-side control devices (voice lamp control device 92, display control device 93, payout control device 100, and the like) to become operable. 1 sec) is executed, and the process waits without proceeding to the next process. Then, after the power-on wait processing period has elapsed, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

After that, when it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and firing control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). , It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105: YES), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (S106), and the checksum is used as the power supply. It is determined whether or not the checksum is the same as the checksum saved at the time of blocking, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

Then, when it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), the power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set to the initial value, and the current gaming state (the state before the power-off is normal if the power-off is normal). A command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92 in order to recognize. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that "1" is not set in the power failure flag (S105: NO), or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal. In the case (S107: NO), after clearing the main RAM 114 as the initialization of the main RAM 114 (S108), the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 103. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to the process of S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to the same step 108.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 103 is not pressed, the step 108 is not executed on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Execute 109. That is, if the power off is normal and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the gaming state of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92.

After that, the process proceeds to the following residual processing. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) described later, but a residual time is generated between a certain timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time will fluctuate according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the following residual processing is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following residual processing is irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 114, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process of steps 110 to 113 is executed.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are only set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt enable processing. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing Is always started immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt processing is completed, it is always sufficient to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of the predetermined data in the main MPU 112, the main data stored in the register of the main MPU 112 at that time is stored at the start of the timer interrupt processing. It is not necessary to execute the save process to the side RAM 114, and similarly, it is not necessary to execute the data return process to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing is performed even though these are being updated. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 112 on a regular basis (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further present at an intermediate position of a signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 112 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of this pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer changes from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of is absorbed by the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 first executes the power failure information storage process (S201). In this power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 117, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, a predetermined power failure time process is executed.

Next, the lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main process (FIG. 16) (S203), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main process (FIG. 16) (S203). S204). Next, the game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

Specifically, various sensors (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 9) such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the game machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not the act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by the fraud detection process (S212) described later, and detects the radio wave. It is determined whether or not an illegal radio wave is output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the sensor, and an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. Judge whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made by any of these fraud determinations, it is assumed that a specific event corresponding to the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

After that, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and if it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. Process is executed (S207). In the output processing of the notification command, the notification command is set as the output target when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the execution setting of the notification corresponding to the content of the specific event is performed. In addition, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the corresponding notification are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is supplied. By starting the supply of operating power while manually operating the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and the firing control device 101 after stopping, the main RAM 114 is not executed as the initialization is executed. Become.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output processing, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt processing, the output processing corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the large winning opening 59a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 59d is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output is started. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 66 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 66a is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, the command set as the output target in each process is output to the voice lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

Next, the reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Subsequently, the general winning opening 55, the first starting opening 56, the normal second starting opening 57, the special second starting opening 58, the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, and the variable winning device starting gate 61 are awarded. The signals received from the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a to be detected are read, and the general winning opening 55, the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, and the special second starting port are used. 58, the winning detection process for specifying whether or not the variable winning device 59, the normal symbol starting gate 60, and the variable winning device starting gate 61 have won a prize is executed (S210).

After that, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if a fraud determination is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined event has occurred and a positive determination is made, the game is played in step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Make settings for stopping. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 206. As described in step 205, the predetermined event is whether or not the act of bringing the magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and the illegal radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not, whether or not an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined launch cycle, in a situation where the launch operation is continued for the operation handle 31. Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. The input state monitoring process for performing the above is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when the disconnection of each of the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a is confirmed, or when the opening of the game machine main body 12 is confirmed, the above step 207 The process for outputting the notification command is executed in the same manner as in. In the output processing of the notification command, the notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 55a, 56a, 57a, 58a, 59c, 60a, 61a are disconnected, and the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. Send the following notification command.
Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If a positive judgment is made in these judgments, a notification command corresponding to the judgment is set as an output target.

Next, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times (variable display times) and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 66 is performed. The general electric control process is executed (S216). The special figure special electric control process in step 215 and the normal figure general electric control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

Subsequently, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps 215 and 216, pending information (first, second special) for winning a prize in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58. In order to reflect the increase / decrease number of the symbol hold number storage areas NA and NB) and the increase / decrease number of the hold information (hold number storage area NC) for winning the normal symbol start gate 60 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d). Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed (S217). Further, when shifting to the open / close execution mode, the number of times the variable winning device 59 in the open / close execution mode is opened is reflected in the round display unit 71c based on the round setting process (FIG. 26) described later. Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed. Further, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (turning off) the display of the round display unit 71c is performed.

Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed, a demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 80 for standby display is executed (S218). The demo display process will be described in detail later.

Then, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout side MPU 122 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

Next, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external output terminal plate 104 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. The external information setting process is executed (S221).

After finishing the external processing information setting processing in step 221 or the output processing of the notification command in step 207, the interrupt end declaration setting is executed (S222). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. In step 222, the next Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the execution of timer interrupt processing. Next, the interrupt permission is set (S223). Once the timer interrupt process is started, the main MPU 112 is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step 223, the interrupt enable is set so that the next timer interrupt process can be executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, the special figure special electric control process of step 215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process.

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring hold information is executed when a prize is generated in the first start port 56, the normal second start port 57, or the special second start port 58, and the process is executed. When the hold information is stored, a pass / fail judgment is made for the hold information, and further, a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the hold information as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round is executed, and the process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, the pending information acquisition process is executed (S301). Here, the process of acquiring the pending information will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information.

In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57, or the special second starting port 58, and the first starting port 56, the normal second starting port 57 Or, if a game ball wins in the special second starting port 58, the maximum number of holdings (up to 4 in the first starting port 56, usually 4 in the second starting port 57 and the special second starting port 58). This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b up to a maximum of 8 in total. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, the winning / failing judgment result, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is a process to do.

First, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 56 is determined based on the detection information of the winning detection sensor 55a (S401). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 56 (there was a start prize) (S401: YES), the value of the hold number Na stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NA is read out. It is determined whether or not the acquired number of pending Na is less than 4 (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings for the first starting port 56 is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of holdings is stored up to the upper limit).

Then, when it is determined that the acquired number of reservations Na is less than 4 (S402: YES), the number of reservations Na of the first special symbol reservation number storage area NA is added by 1, and the total number of reservations storage area NX is added. The total number of reservations Nx is read, and the total number of reservations Nx is added by 1 (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired number of pending Na is 4 (S402: NO), the acquisition process of the present pending information is terminated as it is.

After completing the process of step 403, each numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the first start. The information that the winning of the mouth 56 is a trigger is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Na added by 1 in step 403 of the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA (S404).

After that, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are made to recognize that the first start port 56 has been won, and the hold command setting process, which is a process for executing the hold notification, is executed (S405). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 56 (S401: NO), the game ball has won the normal second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 (starting prize). Whether or not it is determined based on the detection information of the winning detection sensors 57a and 58a (S406). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has normally won the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 (there was a starting prize) (S406: YES), the same processing as in steps 402 to 405 is performed (S407). ~ S410). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the normal second start port 57 or the special second start port 58 (S406: NO), the acquisition process of the pending information is terminated as it is.

It should be noted that the processes of steps 407 to 410 differ only in the processes for winning a prize in the normal second start port 57 or the special second start port 58 for each process from step 402 to step 405. Although detailed description will be omitted, in step 407, the value of the number of holds Nb stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area NB is read and determined, and in step 408, the value of the second special symbol hold number storage area NB is held. The number Nb is added by 1, and the total number of holdings Nx in the total holding number storage area NX is added by 1. In step 409, the numerical information (special information) of each counter C1 to C3, the normal second start port 57 or the special second start The information that the winning of the mouth 58 is a trigger is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Nb added by 1 in step 408 of the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB.

The above is the process of acquiring the pending information. Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step 301, the special figure special electric counter information is input from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. The read process is executed (S302). Further, the process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S303), and the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. The process is executed (S304).

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes the process related to the effect for the game round and the process related to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (S307), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The figure-changing process (S308) and the special figure-determining process (S309), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the processes related to the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (S310), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the special electric open, which is a process for controlling the open state of the grand prize opening 59a, are being performed. Controls the process (S311), the special electric closing process (S312), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the large winning opening 59a, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the transition of the game state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (S313), which is a process for performing the operation, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

Explaining the special figure special electric address table with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure special electric counter can set numerical information of "0" to "6", and the special figure special electric address table has the special figure special electric counter. Information on the start address (“SA0” to “SA6”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination processing, the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing, and the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric open processing. The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric closing processing, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing. ..

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared (initialized) according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to grasp which process should be executed as the special figure special electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, the effect for game times is started when the effects for other game times are not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the game times In the process related to the effect for the game, before starting the effect for the game, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game is being executed is set, and the open / close execution mode is being executed. It becomes necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the flag is set. In addition, during the execution of the effect for the game round, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is being executed is set, and the flag indicating that the confirmation display is being performed is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not it is.

Further, the open / close execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and the other open / close execution modes are not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the open / close execution mode is related. In the process, before starting the open / close execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is completed is set, and the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it has been set, and if it is being opened, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that it is being opened is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not the flag indicating that the large winning opening 59a is being opened is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not.
Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

On the other hand, if the special figure special electric counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for confirming the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the special figure special electric counter and the special figure special electric address table, the special figure fluctuation start processing (S307), the special figure fluctuation processing (S308), the special figure finalizing processing (S309), and the special electric power start processing (S310). ), The special electric power opening process (S311), the special electric power closing process (S312), and the special electric power ending process (S313) will be described.

First, after acquiring the start address of step 304, the setting process for the zero flag is executed (S305). In the zero flag setting process, the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is read based on the read numerical information. To set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". If it is not "0", "0" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" and the zero flag is "1", the zero flag is changed from "1" to "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the main MPU 112, and is the timer in step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Numerical information is subtracted in the update process.

Subsequently, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 304 is executed (S306). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process (S307), and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process (S308). If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to the special figure confirmation processing (S309), and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to the special electric start processing (S310), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the special electric open processing (S311), if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the special electric closed processing (S312), and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing (S313). Then, when the processes of steps 307 to 313 are executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, each process of steps 307 to 313 will be described individually.

First, the special figure variation start processing in step 307 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation start process. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the hold information is stored, and the process for starting the game round in which the variation display is performed on the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Run.

First, the value of the total number of holds Nx is read from the total number of holds storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired number of holds Nx is 1 or more (S501). Then, when it is determined that the total number of reserved numbers Nx is 0 (S501: NO), the present special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of pending numbers Nx is 1 or more (S501: YES), the data setting process is executed (S502). Here, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the data setting process.

Specifically, in this data setting process, first, the value of the hold number Nb is read from the second special symbol hold number storage area NB, and it is determined whether or not the acquired hold number Nb is 1 or more (S601). .. When it is determined that the hold number Nb is 1 or more (S601: YES), the hold number Nb is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1 (S602). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RB1 in the second special symbol hold ball storage area RB is shifted to the execution area RC (S603). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is shifted (S604). Specifically, the process of step 604 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reserved area RB1. , 2nd hold area RB2 → 1st hold area RB1, 3rd hold area RB3 → 2nd hold area RB2, 4th hold area RB4 → 3rd hold area RB3, and so on.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number Nb is not 1 or more (S601: NO), that is, when only the hold number Na is 1 or more, the hold number Na is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1. S605). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RA1 in the first special symbol hold ball storage area RA is shifted to the execution area RC (S606). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is shifted (S607). Specifically, this process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first reserved area RA1 and the first. 2 Hold area RA2 → 1st hold area RA1, 3rd hold area RA3 → 2nd hold area RA2, 4th hold area RA4 → 3rd hold area RA3, and so on, the data in each area is shifted.

After executing the shift process of step 604 or after executing the shift process of step 607, the data of the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 have been shifted, or the first to fourth reserved areas have been executed. A shift command for causing the voice lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data of RB1 to RB4 has been shifted is set as an output target (S608). The shift command set in step 608 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17).

That is, in the present embodiment, it is more likely that the player wins the lottery when the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58 is won (see FIG. 15). If there is hold information related to the second lottery game, priority digestion is performed to preferentially shift the hold information related to the second lottery game to the execution area RC.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21), after executing the data setting process in step 502, the winning / failing determination process (special information determination process), which is a winning lottery, is executed (S503).
In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. judge. Then, when it is determined that the mode is in the high probability mode, the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 14B) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201) is the hit numerical information for the high probability mode. Determine if they match. If it is determined that the mode is in the low probability mode, refer to the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 14 (a)) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201) is the hit numerical information for the low probability mode. Determine if they match. The high-probability mode flag is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the probability variation hit result (FIG. 29, S1303), and then erased at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the normal hit result (FIG. 29, S1303). S1304).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is the winning result (S504). If it is determined that the result is a winning result (S504: YES), the distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S505). In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202) and the winning prize. Grasp the information of the starting port. Then, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 grasped above (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202). Identify which hit result corresponds to. Specifically, in the case where a prize is given to the first starting port 56, the 16R probability variation hit result is obtained by referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit (FIG. 15A). It is specified which of the 4R probability variation hit result and the 16R normal hit result corresponds to. Further, in the case where a prize is normally given to the second starting port 57 or the special second starting port 58, the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 15B) is referred to. It is specified whether the 16R probability variation hit result or the 16R normal hit result corresponds to the hit result.

After that, the stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (S506). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern (lighting state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation this time is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. It is specified from the stop result table for the hit result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for the hit result, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 is set differently for each type of the hit result.

Next, the flag storage process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S507). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the hit result specified in step 505 in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S504: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (S508). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113 for the deviation result. The stop result table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the winning result.

After executing any of the processes of step 507 and step 508, a process of grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) (display mode determination process) is executed (S509). In this process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the winning results, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, although it is not a hit result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RC (numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence. In that case, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS this time is supported. The variable display time information is acquired, and the type of reach (normal reach or super reach) is determined.

The normal reach in the present embodiment is a reach with a short variation display time, and after a reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the interrupted symbol row Z2 is stopped as it is ( This is the so-called “bite stop) fluctuation (see FIG. 6 for the symbol sequence). The super reach is a reach that has a longer variable display time than the normal reach, and is a reach that suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that a hit result will be generated in the game times. For example, the display is displayed after the normal reach. Will be done. In the present embodiment, when the game times this time is a winning result, the probability of selecting the super reach is higher than when it is not a winning result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time table for non-reach generation, which is stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113, is referred to, and the variation type counter CS of this time is used. Acquires variable display time information corresponding to numerical information.

The variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach is different from the variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach occurrence. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the total number of pending numbers Nx increases. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The time is set.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the total number of holdings Nx and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various hit results, a variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of out-reach and the case of out-of-reach non-occurrence (complete off). In this case, the variable display time is distributed according to each game result.

Next, the information on the fluctuation display time acquired in step 509 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e (S510). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process (S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Further, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 80 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the game round is performed. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line), the confirmation display (final stop display) is performed over the confirmation time (final stop time).
In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 509 is the total time for one game minus the fixed time. In this respect, the variable display time can be rephrased as the time before the confirmation (the time before the final stop).

Subsequently, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets (S511). The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table is the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach generation variation display time table. The variable display time acquired by normal reach is also different from the variable display time acquired by super reach. Therefore, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach, the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, reaches from the information on the fluctuation display time. It is possible to identify the presence or absence of occurrence. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach. Note that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred and information that directly indicates the type of reach.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 16R probability variation hit result, the 4R probability variation hit result, and the 16R normal hit result as the game result information. The variation command and the type command set as output targets in step 511 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Will be done.

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g (S512), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is stored (S512: YES), it is provided in the main RAM 114. The time reduction counter stored in the time reduction counter area 114h is decremented by 1 (S513). The time reduction counter is set to a specified number of times (100 in the present embodiment) after the ending time in the open / close execution mode caused by the 4R normal hit result or the 16R normal hit result has elapsed (FIG. 29, S1305).

After subtracting 1 from the time reduction counter, or when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not stored (S512: NO), the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 is started (S514), and the special figure special electric counter is turned on. 1 is added (S515). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step 515 is executed. ". After that, the special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step 308 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure. The special figure change processing is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the variation display time in the production for this game round has elapsed ( S701). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" and the zero flag is set to "1" is the fluctuation display time in the production for this game round. It means that it has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S701: NO), the main display unit 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so that the update timing of the main display unit 71 (update of the light emission pattern) It is determined whether or not it is (timing) (S702). Then, when it is determined that it is not the update timing (S702: NO), the processing during the change of the special figure is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update timing is reached (S702: YES), the update content reading process is executed (S703). For this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113i of the main ROM 113.

Next, an update process is executed in which the update content read in step 703 is set for the update of the main display unit 71 (S704). The process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 71 is executed by the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S701: YES), the fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as the output target (S705). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the effect for the current game round.

Then, the process of reading the stop result is executed (S706). In the read-out process, at the start of the current game round, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed, which is set in the main RAM 114 in step 506 or step 508 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21), is read out. After that, an update process is executed in which the information on the mode of the read pattern is set for updating the main display unit 71 (S707).

Subsequently, the information of the fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the fixed time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S708). Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S709). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the special figure changing processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the processing of step 709 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

Next, the process during special figure determination in step 309 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the processing during the determination of the special figure. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the production for this game round has elapsed (S801). ). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the fixed time has passed in the production for this game. It means that you did. If it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S801: NO), the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the fixed time has passed (S801: YES), the winning / failing determination that triggered the current game is determined by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result of is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode) (S802). In the various hit result flag storage areas 114k, the flags corresponding to the hit results are stored in the flag storage process of step 307 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21).

If it is determined that the winning is won (S802: YES), the opening command is set as the output target (S803). The opening command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. The processing content of the audio side MPU 152 by receiving the opening command will be described in detail later, but when the audio side MPU 152 receives the opening command, it executes various processes (FIGS. 34, S1712, S1713) and displays side. An opening command is transmitted to the MPU 162 (FIG. 34, S1714). The processing content due to the display side MPU 162 receiving the opening command from the voice side MPU 152 will be described in detail later, but when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command from the voice side MPU 152, the display side MPU 162 sets the opening data table ( FIG. 37, S2006) is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 38, the symbol display device 80 fires a game ball so as to pass through the characters “big hit !!”, a corresponding background image (not shown), and the variable winning device start gate 61 (). An opening image is displayed suggesting that you should hit right. The opening command also includes information on the type of hit result (16R probability variation hit result, 4R probability variation hit result, 16R normal hit result, 4R normal hit result) that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S804). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the process of step 804 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not won (S802: NO), that is, when the result of the winning / failing determination that triggered the game round this time is a wrong result (that is, the result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode). Is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more (S805). Then, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is 0 (S805: NO), the time reduction flag is deleted if the time reduction flag is stored in the time reduction flag storage area 114g (S806). After clearing the time saving flag, or when it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter is 1 or more (S805: YES), the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S807). After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

Next, the special electric start processing of step 310 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special electric power start processing. The special electric power start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "3".

In the special electric start processing, first, whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 is determined based on the detection information of the detection sensor 61a (S901). The situation in which it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 in the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" is the opening image (FIG. 38) on the symbol display device 80. (See) is displayed, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61.
Then, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 (S901: NO), the special electric power start process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 (S901: YES), the number of rounds corresponding to various hit results is applied to the round counters provided in the other various counter areas 114 m of the main RAM 114. The setting process for the round to set is performed (S902). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the main MPU 112, and one round is consumed in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode. "1" is subtracted each time.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the winning result is obtained in step 504 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21), and the confirmation time has elapsed in step 801 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 24). Even if it is determined, the opening / closing execution mode (round game) is not started immediately (automatically), and in order to start the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device start gate 61 is used as a game ball. It is necessary to determine that has passed. Therefore, the player does not need to launch the game ball immediately when the winning result is obtained, and the player can start the opening / closing execution mode at the player's own timing. As described above, this special electric train start process is a process that is executed after the fixed time has elapsed, even if it is a winning result. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 before the fixed time elapses, the open / close execution mode is not started.

Further, as described above, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always wins a prize in the special second starting port 58. Therefore, determining that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 in step 901 means that the game ball always wins the special second starting port 58. That is, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode is always started with the game ball winning in the special second starting port 58. In other words, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode is started in a state in which the second lottery game triggered by the winning of the game ball in the special second starting port 58 is held.

Here, the setting process for the round of step 902 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the round.

First, "10" is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in the winning counters provided in the other various counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114 (S1001). The winning counter is a counter in which "1" is subtracted each time a game ball is won in the large winning opening 59a.

Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the special electric start processing is the 16R probability variation hit result. (S1002). Then, when it is determined that the result is not the 16R probability variation hit result (S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the result is the 16R normal hit result (S1003).

When it is determined that the result is a 16R probability variation hit (S1002: YES), and when it is determined that the result is a 16R normal hit result (S1003: YES), after setting "16" in the round counter (S1004), this End the setting process for the round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not the 16R normal hit result (S1003: NO), the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k indicate the 4R probability variation hit result or the 4R normal hit result. After setting "4" in the round counter (S1005), the setting process for this round ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric power start process (FIG. 25), after the setting process for the round of step 902 is completed, the first large winning opening 59a according to the hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is opened. Read the duration information (S903). In this embodiment, the initial opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S904).

Next, the opening setting process for opening the large winning opening 59a is executed (S905).
In this open setting process, "1" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 59a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 59d is started in order to switch the large winning opening 59a to the open state, and the open / close execution mode is started. Is started.

Subsequently, after setting the release command as the output target (S906), the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (S907). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the special electric start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 907 is executed. Become. After that, the special electric train start process is completed.

Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step 311 in the special power special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the special electric power. The processing during opening of the special electric power is the processing after the special electric power start processing, and the numerical information of the special electric power counter is "4".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening duration in the current round game has elapsed (S1101). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

When it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1101: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1102). Subsequently, the closing time information (for example, 1 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the closing time setting process is performed in which the closing time information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1103). Then, a closing setting process for closing the large winning opening 59a is executed (S1104). In the closing setting process, "0" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 59a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 59d is stopped in order to switch the large winning opening 59a to the closed state.

After that, after setting the close command as the output target (S1105), the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1106). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing during opening of the special electric power is executed is "4", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing of step 1106 is executed is "5". Become. After that, the processing during the opening of this special electric train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening duration has not elapsed (S1101: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the large winning opening 59a based on the detection information from the winning detection sensor 59c (S1107). ). Then, when it is determined that there is no winning in the large winning opening 59a (S1107: NO), the processing during the opening of the special electric train is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize in the large prize opening 59a (S1107: YES), the prize counter is subtracted by 1 (S1108). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is "0" (S1109), and if it is determined to be "0" (S1109: YES), after executing the processes of steps 1102 to 1106, the present Ends processing while the special electric power is open. On the other hand, if the winning counter is not "0" (S1109: NO), the processing during the opening of the special electric power is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing during closing of the special electric power in step 312 in the special drawing special electric power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing during closing of the special electric train. The special electric power closing process is a process after the special electric power opening process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "5".

First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is "0" (S1201). If the round counter is not "0" (S1201: NO), has the closing time elapsed by checking whether "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112? Whether or not it is determined (S1202). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where "1" is set in the zero flag in the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" means that the closing time has passed. If it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1202: NO), the processing during closing of this special electric train is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1202: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter (S1203). Subsequently, the read processing of the open duration is executed (S1204). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k, the result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out and based on these. The information on the duration for opening the large winning opening 59a is read out. In the pachinko machine 10, the opening duration is set to correspond to a long time mode in all rounds in each hit result. Then, the read information on the open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1205).

Subsequently, the open setting process is executed (S1206). The processing content of the opening setting process is the same as the opening setting process of step 905 in the special electric power start process (FIG. 25). Next, after setting the release command as the output target (S1207), the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (S1208). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric power closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 1208 is executed. It becomes. After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is "0" (S1201: YES), the ending command is set as the output target (S1209). The ending command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1210). Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1211). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special figure closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" when the process of step 1211 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

Next, the special electric power termination process of step 313 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special electric power termination process. The special electric power end process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "6".

First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1301). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1301: NO), the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1301: YES), the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is set to the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114. With reference to the flag stored in, it is determined whether or not the result is a probability variation hit (S1302). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation hit result (16R probability variation hit result or 4R probability variation hit result) (S1302: YES), the high probability mode flag is set in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114. If it is not stored, the high probability mode flag is stored (S1303). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode that ended this time is not a probability variation hit result (16R normal hit result or 4R normal hit result) (S1302: NO), there is a high probability. If the mode flag is stored, after erasing the high probability mode flag (S1304), the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g of the main RAM 114 (if the time saving flag is already stored). (Maintain as it is) and set "100" to the time reduction counter in the time reduction counter area 114h (S1305). In the process of step 1303 or step 1305, the flags indicating the information corresponding to the types of hit results are also deleted from the various hit result flag storage areas 114k.
After executing the process of step 1303 or step 1305, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S1306), and the special electric end process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the open / close execution mode is executed when the game ball passes through the variable winning device starting gate 61 (FIG. 25, S901: YES), and the variable winning device starting gate The game ball that has passed through 61 always wins a prize in the special second starting port 58. That is, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, at least one second lottery game is held. Therefore, in the first special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21) after the special electric stop process (FIG. 29) is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step 601 in the data setting process (FIG. 22) of step 502, and the affirmative determination is made in step 503. The winning / failing determination of the second lottery game is executed in the winning / failing determination process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control process is executed by using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter.
For this reason, when the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games composed of the effect for game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, the special figure special electric counter may be referred to. It is not necessary to check multiple flags at each processing timing as in. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, in each of the processes of steps 307 to 313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for ending a certain situation and performing a transition to the next situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, "0", which is the initial value of the special figure special electric counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of game situations including the effect for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to set the first situation in the above series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter after the initialization of the main RAM 114 or the like.

Further, when updating the special figure special electric counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

Further, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above series of game situations is set separately from each process of steps 307 to 313, and refer to the special figure special electric counter. It is not included in each process executed. As a result, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information can be simplified.

Further, among the processes of steps 307 to 313, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period is measured by using a common period measuring means called a special figure special electric timer counter. The measurement is done. As a result, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situations corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter do not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is referred to at the same time in a plurality of situations. There is no such thing, and the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

Further, the process of updating the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process in step 211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) set as a process different from steps 307 to 313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electric timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps 307 to 313.

Further, the confirmation of whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" is collectively performed in step 305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), and is performed in steps 308, S309, and S311 to 313. In each process, the passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112. As a result, in each process of steps 308, S309, S311 to 313, when numerical information is read from the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 114 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is "0". Compared with, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Here, the special figure special electric counter is referred to in order to confirm which situation is in a series of games including the effect for game rotation and the open / close execution mode even in the processing other than the special figure special electric control processing. To. For example, the special figure special electric counter is also referred to in the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), and the demo display process will be described later.

Next, the normal drawing control processing executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the Fuzu Fuden control process.

In the normal symbol control process, when a prize is generated in the normal symbol start gate 60, a process for acquiring the hold information of the normal symbol is executed, and the hold information of the normal symbol is stored. In addition, the release determination of the electric accessory 66 is performed for the reserved information, and further, the opening determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for a normal symbol. Further, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 66 is executed based on the result of the opening determination.

Specifically, first, the process of acquiring the hold information of the ordinary symbol is executed (S1401). In the acquisition process, the numerical information of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (that is, the hold information of the normal symbol) is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 60. Execute the process to be performed. It should be noted that the acquisition of the hold information of the ordinary symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of hold (4 in this embodiment).

Next, a process of reading the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1402), and the Fuzu Fuden address table storage area 113h of the main ROM 113 is used. The process of reading the information in the address table is executed (S1403). Then, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden address table is executed (S1404).

Explaining the processing contents of steps 1402 to 1404, as described above, the fuzu-fuden control process includes a process related to the effect for the fuzu and a process related to opening / closing of the electric accessory 66. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the normal map, the normal map fluctuation start process, the normal map change process, and the normal map finalization process are set. Further, as the processing related to the opening and closing of the electric accessory 66, a processing during the opening of the electric power and a processing during the closing of the electric power are set.

In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is stored in the Fuzu Fuden address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

Explaining the Fuzu Fuden address table with reference to Fig. 31, the Fuzu Fuden counter can set numerical information from "0" to "4", and the Fuzu Fuden address table has Fuzu. The start address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the general electric counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the process during confirmation of the normal figure, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during the opening of the normal power, and the start address NSA4 is the closed state of the normal power. The start address of the program for executing the process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter.

According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special electric control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process should be executed as the normal figure normal electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the Fuzu Fuden counter and the Fuzu Fuden address table, the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the Fuzu fluctuation processing, the Fuzu confirmation processing, the Fuden opening processing, and the Fuden closing processing are performed. The processing configuration for execution will be described.

After executing the process of step 1404, the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol is executed (S1405). In the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol, the numerical information of the normal-sized timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read from the normal-sized normal-sized timer counter area 114j, and the numerical information of the normal-sized normal-sized timer counter is "0". In the case of "", the process of setting "1" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is executed.
In other words, when the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter is not "0", the process of setting "0" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (erasing "1"). To execute. The Fuzu Fuden timer counter is a counter used by the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the Fuzu Fuden counter according to the passage of time, and is step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Numerical information is subtracted in the timer update process of.

Next, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1404 is executed (S1406). Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation start process (S1407), and when the acquired start address is NSA1, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation process (S1408). , If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the normal drawing confirmation processing (S1409), and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the normal electric opening processing (S1410) and the acquired start. If the address is NSA4, the process (S1411) during closing of the normal electric power is jumped.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S1407), on the condition that the hold information of the normal symbol is stored, the release determination of the electric accessory 66 is performed using the hold information of the normal symbol, and the main display unit 71 In the other display unit 71d of the above, the process of starting the variable display (blinking display) of the pattern is executed. In the open determination of the electric accessory 66, the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of winning than the low-frequency support mode. Further, whether or not the high frequency support mode is set is determined based on whether or not the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored. However, as will be described later in the fourth embodiment below, step 504 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21) even in the high frequency support mode (even if the high frequency support flag is stored). When it is determined that the winning is won, the opening judgment of the electric accessory 66 is that the opening / closing execution mode due to the winning is changed from the time when the corresponding variation display corresponding to the winning is confirmed. The same judgment as in the low frequency support mode is executed until the end. Further, in the normal figure fluctuation start processing, the information of the variable display time for displaying the pattern in a variable manner on the other display unit 71d is set in the normal figure normal electric timer counter, and the variable display of the pattern on the other display unit 71d is started. In this case, the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "0" to "1".

In the normal map changing process (S1408), other processes for updating the display on the display unit 71d are executed. In this case, on condition that the passage of the variable display time is confirmed, the information of the fixed time is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

In the normal figure confirmation processing (S1409), a process for displaying the result of the opening determination this time on the other display unit 71d for the confirmation time of the normal symbol is executed, and the result of the opening determination is the winning result. A process for opening the electric accessory 66 and a process for setting the number of times of opening the electric accessory 66 when the electric accessory 66 is opened are executed with the winning result of this time as an opportunity. In this case, on condition that the passage of the fixed time of the normal symbol has been confirmed and the result of the opening judgment is the winning result, the information of the opening duration of this time in the electric accessory 66 is input to the Fuzu Fuden timer counter. At the same time, the electric accessory 66 is opened, and the normal-figure counter is updated from "2" to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the opening judgment is not the winning result even though the lapse of the confirmation time of the normal symbol is confirmed, the electric accessory 66 is not set to be in the open state, and the normal figure general electric counter is set to ". 0 ”The processing to clear is executed.

In the process of opening the electric accessory (S1410), the process for maintaining the open state of the electric accessory 66 and closing the electric accessory 66 when the closing timing is reached is executed. In this case, on condition that the elapse of the opening duration of the electric accessory 66 is confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 66 is set in the normal electric timer counter, and the electric accessory 66 is closed. The state is set, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4".

In the process during closing of the electric utility (S1411), when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 66 and to open the electric accessory 66 again, the process for opening the electric accessory 66. To execute. In this case, on condition that it is confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 66 has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the electric accessory 66, the information on the current opening duration of the electric accessory 66 is provided. It is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, the electric accessory 66 is opened, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "4" to "3". On the other hand, if it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 66 again even though the lapse of the closing duration of the electric accessory 66 has been confirmed, the electric accessory 66 is not set to be in the open state. Figure The process of clearing the normal power counter to "0" is executed.

When any of the processes of steps 1407 to 1411 is executed, the present power control process is terminated.

As described above, by using the Fuzu Fuden counter, the Fuzu Fuden address table, and the Fuzu Fuden timer counter to execute the Fuzu Fuden control process, the production and electric role for the Fuzu When the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games consisting of the opening and closing of the object 66, it is sufficient to refer to the Fuzu Fuden counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, when updating the Fuzu Fuden counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. Further, since the zero flag of the normal symbol is used as in the case of the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control processing, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Next, the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a demo display process.

First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1501). When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the effect for the game round is not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed.

Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence or absence of the flag that the effect for game rounds is being executed as in the conventional case, and the presence or absence of the flag is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, first It is necessary to read the information of the flag of 1 from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information, and then read the information of the other flag from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information. Then, it is necessary to specify the address to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to set the data in the register at least twice when the data is transferred to the address. On the other hand, by using the special figure special electric counter, the address to the main RAM 114 can be specified only once, and the data setting process to the register when data is transferred to it can be done only once. .. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

If it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is not "0" (S1501: NO), the process for displaying this demo is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1501). : YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the demo display state (S1502).

The demo display state means that the symbol display device 80 has already performed the demo display (that is, the standby display), and the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. In addition, the demo display is a predetermined demo display waiting time (for example, after the confirmation time elapses after displaying the stop result of the previous game round or after the ending of the previous open / close execution mode is completed. , 0.1 sec), the image of the start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 perform the effect accordingly. To say.

In the demo display on the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the effective line performs a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbol is a predetermined one. After or instead of displaying the operating image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed.

If it is determined that the demo display state is present (S1502: YES), the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the demo display state is not present (S1502: NO), the demo display wait state is set. Whether or not it is determined (S1503). The demo display waiting state means that the measurement of the demo display waiting time has already started, and the demo display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. is there.

When it is determined that the demo display waiting state is not set (S1503: N0), the demo display waiting time information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the demo display waiting time information is used as the special figure special electric timer counter. (S1504). Subsequently, the demo display waiting state is set by storing the demo display waiting flag in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114 (S1505). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the demo display waiting state is in effect (S1503: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1506). If it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" (S1506: NO), the demo display process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1506: YES), the demo display state is set by storing the demo display flag in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114 (S1507). ). In the process of step 1507, the demo display waiting flag is cleared to release the demo display waiting state. In addition, the demo display state is canceled by clearing the demo display flag when the effect for the game round is newly started. Next, the demo start command is set as the output target (S1508). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, execution control of effect and notification using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in, for example, 4 msec.

In the timer interrupt processing, first, the main command storage process is executed (S1601), and the display side command storage process is executed (S1602). The main command storage process in step 1601 is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the audio side RAM 154 when a command is received from the main MPU 112, and the display side command storage process in step 1602 is the display side. When a command is received from the MPU 162, this is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the audio side RAM 154. This command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Next, the main command correspondence process for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 112 is executed (S1603), and the display side command correspondence for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the display MPU 162 is executed. The process is executed (S1604). In the display-side command correspondence process in step 1604, although specific description is omitted, since various commands are transmitted from the display-side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing during the game (FIG. 36, S1907), the received command is used. Execute the corresponding process. The main command correspondence process in step 1603 will be described in detail later.

Subsequently, the frame button correspondence process is executed (S1605). In this frame button correspondence process, for example, a predetermined key of the second frame button 27 is operated by the player on the condition that the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times or open / close execution mode). If so, set the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation for updating. Further, if the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times and open / close execution mode), or if one unit of game times is processed, the variation display of the game times is stopped. The first frame button 26 is provided on the condition that the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect such as the conversation effect or the character effect) is not displayed before the predetermined period (for example, before the predetermined period when the reach is displayed). Is operated by the player, a stage change command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. As a result, the display side MPU 162 changes the background stage displayed on the display screen 80a in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage" and displays it. Further, if the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during the period in which the notice effect in the case where one unit of the game times is processed is displayed, the notice response effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. To do. As a result, on the display side MPU 162, the response effect corresponding to the notice effect is displayed on the display screen 80a, and a new character pattern, moving image, or the like is displayed. Whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated is determined by a signal from the first frame button detection sensor 26a that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26. Similarly, whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from the second frame button detection sensor 27a that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

Next, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 is executed (S1606), and a voice control process for performing voice control of the speaker unit 34 is executed (S1607). In the light emission control process and the voice control process, when the information is set for update in the frame button correspondence process in step 1605, the main command correspondence process (FIG. 35) described later, or the display side command correspondence process. It is executed based on the information. Subsequently, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S1608).

Next, the main command correspondence process in step 1603 in the timer interrupt process of the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34 and 35 are flowcharts showing main command correspondence processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command are received from the main MPU 112 (S1701), and if it is determined that these commands are received (S1701: YES), the game result is stored. Is executed (S1702). Specifically, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game round is specified from the variation command, the presence or absence of reach occurs from the variation display time, and the normal reach when reach occurs. Alternatively, it is specified which is the super reach, and the process of writing the specified information to the retained data area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed. In addition, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game round, that is, the game of this game round. Information on whether or not the result is a winning result, and if it is a winning result (winning in the winning or losing lottery), is specified, and the specified information is stored in the retained data area provided in the audio side RAM 154. The process of writing to 154b is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154b is data that is temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the notification, and after these effects and notifications are started. Is also an area for storing and holding data to be independently used by the voice MPU 152.

Next, the advance notice lottery process is executed (S1703). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 80 in this game round. As this notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 80 starts the variable display of the symbol, or a part of the notice display. In a situation where a symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the previous mode. It also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the winning results than in the game times corresponding to the missed results, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

Next, the stop symbol determination process is executed (S1704). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a winning result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is used as the information of the current stop result. decide. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Subsequently, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed (S1705). In this process, information on the variation display time of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information on the variation display time, the information on the game result specified in step 1702 above, and An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in step 1703 is selected.

Next, a process of writing the type of the stop symbol determined in step 1704 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 1705 to the holding data area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S1706). Since the effect pattern includes information on the variable display time of the game times this time, by writing the information on the effect pattern in the holding data area 154b, not only the information on the effect pattern but also the information on the variable display time can be obtained. However, the voice side MPU 152 can be read again. In addition, the voice side MPU 152 can again grasp whether or not the current game round is a winning result from the type of the stop symbol.

Subsequently, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 1704 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 1705 are transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1707). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of this command will be described later.

Next, the game count update process is executed (S1708). In this update process, a process for updating the game count counter is executed so that the number of digested games measured by the game counters provided in the various counter areas 154c of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of digested games is the number of games that have been digested after the end of the open / close execution mode without shifting to the open / close execution mode again. In the voice side MPU 152, the information on the number of digested games can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of digested games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is easy to select a predetermined notice display in the notice lottery process. Execute the processing that becomes.

It is determined whether or not the fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received when it is determined that the change command and the type command have not been received (S1701: NO) or after the game count update process has been executed. (S1709). Then, when it is determined that the confirmation stop command has been received (S1709: YES), the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1710). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to make the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S1709: NO), or after the process of transmitting the symbol stop command is executed, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1711). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1711: YES), the update process for the number of hits is executed (S1712). In the update process, a process for updating the hit count counter is executed so that the number of hits measured by the hit count counters provided in various counter areas 154c of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called continuous hits) that occur after shifting to the high-frequency support mode without shifting to the low-frequency support mode. In the audio side MPU 152, the information on the number of hits can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is a predetermined number or more, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image in the open / close execution mode can be produced. To be executed.

Next, the opening correspondence process is executed (S1713). In the opening correspondence process, the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect content in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the hit result is determined. Execute the processing for. For example, the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the 16R probability variation hit result, and in the game round immediately before that, the symbol display device 80 does not use the same odd-numbered symbol combination, but the same even-numbered symbol. When the final stop display of the combination is displayed, an effect including a content for making the player recognize that it is a 16R probability variation hit result is determined as an effect during the opening / closing execution mode this time. That is, in the production of the game times, the hit result with the low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent hit production, the hit promotion effect indicating that the hit is the hit with the high game value is determined as the effect in the open / close execution mode. To do.

As already explained here, in the holding data area 154b of the audio side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the stop symbol of the game times in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game times. , When the open / close execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the retained data area 154b are cleared when the open / close execution mode ends. .. Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the open / close execution mode as described above. ..

Further, in the opening corresponding process of step 1713, the number of hits after the update in step 1712 is specified, and the effect corresponding to the specified number of hits is set as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode this time.

Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 1713 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1714). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1711: NO), or after the process of transmitting the opening command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S1715). When it is determined that the release command has been received (S1715: YES), the display side MPU 162 is notified that the variable winning device 59 has been newly started to be released, that is, one round game has been newly started. A release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 for recognition (S1716). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the release command will be described later.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1715: NO), or after the process of transmitting the release command is executed, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S1717). When it is determined that the closing command has been received (S1717: YES), the display is displayed so that the display side MPU 162 recognizes that the variable winning device 59 has been closed, that is, the round game of 1 has been completed. A closure command is sent to the side MPU 162 (S1718). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S1717: NO), or after the process of transmitting the closing command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received as shown in FIG. (S1801). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1801: YES), the ending correspondence process is executed (S1802). In the ending correspondence process, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the winning / losing lottery mode is executed. To do. In the present embodiment, since the high-probability mode is always set after the opening / closing execution mode, the effect including the content for making the player recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time.

Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 1802 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1803). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1801: NO), or after the process of transmitting the ending command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S1804). When it is determined that the notification command is being received (S1804: YES), it means that an event to be notified such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In order to perform the notification, the light emission data is read out from the various data table storage areas 153a (S1805), and the audio data is read out (S1806). As a result, in the light emission control process (S1606) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission is performed according to the light emission data, and the voice control of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) is performed. In the process (S1607), the voice of the speaker unit 34 is controlled so that the sound corresponding to the voice data is output. After that, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1807). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so that the notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1804: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S1808). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. Therefore, when it is determined that the release command has been received (S1808: YES), it means that the event to be notified such as the abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10 has been canceled. In order to cancel the notification, the release setting process is executed (S1809). After that, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1810). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1808: NO), or after the release command has been transmitted and other corresponding processing is executed (S1815), the main command correspondence process is terminated. In other corresponding processing, for example, when the hold command is received, the hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162, and when the shift time command is received, the shift time command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. .. As a result, in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Dt, Ds and the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80, the reserved area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 is stored. A predetermined reserved symbol is displayed in the corresponding display area. Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. As a result, the demo display is started on the symbol display device 80.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU 162, and this V interrupt processing is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP165 of the display control device 93 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 80, the VDP165 starts to output the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the front view of the display screen 80a, and the dot The image signal is sequentially output to the dots lined up on the horizontal line including one end, and the image signal is output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line, and the front view right of the display screen 80a. Finally, the image signal is output for the dots in the lower corner. In this case, the VDP 165 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display side MPU 162 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display side MPU 162 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal.

However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started. Further, as described above, when data is not set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the reserved symbol display area 167a (data meaning a blank is set), the reserved symbol is displayed. No image is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds, Dt, and Du of the display screen 80a corresponding to the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the use area 167a, or the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. The background image is displayed.

In the V interrupt process, first, the content of the command stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 is analyzed (S1901). In the command storage area 164a, commands are sequentially stored by a command storage process that is activated when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 92. This command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Subsequently, based on the analysis result of step 1901, it is determined whether or not a new command is being received (S1902), and if it is determined that a new command is being received (S1902: YES), the command correspondence process is performed. Execute (S1903).

Here, the command correspondence process of step 1903 in the V interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process.

In the command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the stop result command and the pattern command are received (S2001). When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have been received (S2001: YES), the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. After executing the data table setting process for the pattern to be written to the work RAM 164 (S2002), the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the game round is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round is defined.

In addition, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game times is set in the pattern data table, and the task content information and command output correspond to each pointer information. Information on the presence or absence of and information on additional data are set.

The task content information is information that is set to display the video corresponding to this game time, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information at all is set as additional data, each An image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in the frame.
In the information of the content of the task, information of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 and the type of the command. In this way, by making the command output from the display side MPU 162 to the audio side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, the various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 respond to the content of the image. In addition to being able to produce light, the speaker unit 34 can also produce audio output according to the content of the image.

The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when the notification command is received or the warning response effect command is received. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content.

When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have not been received (S2001: NO), it is determined whether or not the fixed stop command has been received (S2003). If it is determined that the fixed stop command has been received (S2003: YES), the fixed stop setting process is executed (S2004), and then the command corresponding process is terminated. In the setting process for fixed stop, the data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round until the period during the fixed stop display elapses is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to.

When it is determined that the confirmation stop command has not been received (S2003: NO), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2005). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2005: YES), the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2006). Terminate command handling processing.

The opening data table is used to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information that defines the processing required for.
The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

In the data table for the opening, the contents of the effect are defined during each round game and during the interval period between the round games from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until the end of the corresponding round game, and similarly, the data during the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until. Then, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the opening command is received, as shown in FIG. 38, the game ball is passed through the characters "big hit !!", the corresponding background image (not shown), and the variable winning device start gate 61. An opening image is displayed suggesting that it should be fired (right-handed). Then, when the player hits the game ball to the right while the opening image is displayed and the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61, the main MPU 112 performs the special electric start process (FIG. 25) in step 901. An affirmative judgment is made, and the release command is set as the output target in step 906. In other words, the opening image continues to be displayed on the symbol display device 80 until the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2005: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the open command and the close command has been received (S2007). If it is determined that any of the commands has been received (S2007: YES), the processing corresponding to this command is terminated after the setting processing at the time of opening / closing is executed (S2008). In the setting process at the time of opening and closing, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

When it is determined that the open command and the close command have not been received (S2007: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2009). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2009: YES), the setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2010). Terminate command handling processing.

The ending data table is necessary to display one frame of images at each update timing of the images when displaying the moving image corresponding to the effect for the ending on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2009: NO), another corresponding process (S2011) is executed, and then this command corresponding process is terminated.

Next, another corresponding process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing another corresponding process.

In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification command is received (S2101). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2101: YES), the notification data setting process is executed (S2102), and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the notification data setting process, the notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written to the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table.
As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is added to the effect image for the game round and the effect image for the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2103). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2103: YES), the notification data clearing process is executed (S2104), and then the corresponding processing is terminated. In the notification data clearing process, among the notification data currently set in the additional data in the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type to be released is canceled.

If it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2103: NO), and after executing other corresponding processing (S2105), the corresponding processing for each is terminated.

In other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received, and when it is determined that a hold command is being received, the display of the hold information on the symbol display device 80 corresponds to an increase in the number of holds. The process of writing the information to be changed to the work RAM 164 is executed. Since the hold command includes information on which of the first start port 56 and the second start ports 57 and 58 is the hold information for winning the prize, the display screen 80a is won. The display of the number of pending items on the side is increased. Further, when it is determined that the advance notice response effect command is received, the response effect data corresponding to the advance notice effect (conversation effect or character effect) is written. As a result, after the next image update timing, the response effect to the advance notice effect is started.

Further, it is determined whether or not the shift command is received, and if it is determined that the shift command is received, the shift setting process is performed. In the shift setting process, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information set in each unit area RE1 to RE4 and RF1 to RF4 of the reserved symbol display area 167a to the lower area side or the execution unit area RG is transmitted to the work RAM 164. Write. Specifically, since the shift command includes information on which reserved symbol information is to be shifted, when shifting the reserved symbol information in the first reserved symbol display area RE, the first Unit area RE1 → Execution unit area RG is written with information to shift the reserved symbol information, 2nd unit area RE2 → 1st unit area RE1, 3rd unit area RE3 → 2nd unit area RE2, 4th unit area RE4 → Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RE3, is written. Similarly, when shifting the second reserved symbol display area RF, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the first unit area RF1 → the execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RF2 → the first unit area RF1. , 3rd unit area RF3 → 2nd unit area RF2, 4th unit area RF4 → 3rd unit area RF3, etc. Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area is written. As a result, the reserved symbols in the lower display area Dn are shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area having a smaller number.

Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the data table for displaying the demo is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to. Further, it is determined whether or not the stage change command is received, and if the stage change command is received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is displayed from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. The process of reading and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the game times is not displayed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 36), when it is determined that there is no new command (S1902: NO), or when the command corresponding process in step 1903 is executed, the pointer update process is executed (S1904). In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the display side MPU 162 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

Next, the task process is executed (S1905). Here, the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a task process executed by the display side MPU 162.

In the task processing, first, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the pointer this time in the data table (S2201), and when it is determined that the additional data does not exist (S2201). : NO), the task data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2202). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data (S2203). ), End this task processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the data table that additional data exists in the area corresponding to the pointer information this time (S2201: YES), whether or not the additional data is additional data to the image of the task data. Is determined (S2204). When it is determined that the data is additional data (S2204: YES), the task data and additional data of the pointer of this time are read from the data table (S2205). Then, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data and the additional data, after performing the calculation of the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 (S2206). , End this task processing. The cases where the processes of steps 2205 and 2206 are executed include the case where a character image of the notification is added.

When it is determined that the additional data is not the additional data (S2204: NO), the additional data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2207). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read additional data ( S2208), this task processing is terminated. In addition, the case where the processing of step 2207 and step 2208 is executed includes the case where the response effect to the advance notice effect is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 36), after executing the task process of step 1905, whether or not the command data exists in the area of the data table where there is no command output corresponding to the information of the pointer this time. It is determined whether or not it is the command output timing by determining (S1906). If the command data exists, it is determined that it is the command output timing (S1906: YES), and the command setting process is executed (S1907). In this command setting process, a command is transmitted based on the timing (pointer information) determined to be the command output timing. Specifically, a command indicating that the production of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the advance notice production should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, A command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, a command indicating that the effect of the open / close execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the interval between round games should be started, and a command indicating that the effect of the ending should be started. A command, a command indicating that the demo display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the audio side MPU 152 according to each timing.

In this case, a command indicating that the advance notice effect should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode effect should be started, and a round. The command indicating that the effect of the interval between games should be started and the command indicating that the effect of the ending should be started include the contents of the type of the effect.

In addition, the command indicating that the advance notice production should be started, the command indicating that the normal reach should be started, the command indicating that the super reach should be started, and the command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended are the commands of the relevant command. It contains information indicating how many frames after the output timing the target effect should be started. As a result, even if these commands are transmitted at a timing prior to the start timing of the target effect for each command, the voice MPU 152 synchronizes with the start of the target effect on the symbol display device 80 and transmits electricity. It is possible to start the target effect on the light emitting unit including the decoration unit 33 and the speaker unit 34.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice side MPU 152 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 162 when the main side MPU 112 is used as a reference, but the voice side MPU 152 has a command transmitted from the display side MPU 162. Control of the production is also performed based on. Therefore, it is difficult for a gap between the light emitting effect and the sound effect executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display effect executed by the display side MPU 162 to occur, and the effect using each effect means is preferably executed. Can be done.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 36), when it is determined that the command output timing is not reached (S1906: NO), or when the command setting process of step 1907 is executed, after the drawing list output process is executed (S1908). ), Ends this V interrupt process. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP165.
In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, the image of one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, first, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged, and when the winning lottery is won (FIG. 21, S504: YES), the game ball opens and closes by passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61. The execution mode is started (FIG. 25, S901: YES). Therefore, when the player wins the winning lottery, the player can start the opening / closing execution mode (round game) at the player's own timing.

Here, as in the present embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are provided and the second lottery game is won, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first lottery game is won. A problem (problem) that may occur in a game machine having a high probability of being given the open / close execution mode will be described.

That is, in such a game machine, the player expects that the second lottery game is executed in the high frequency support mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is given by the second lottery game as a hit. Expect. In other words, the player does not want the first lottery game to be performed in the high frequency support mode itself. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the first lottery game is a hit, and the result is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the second lottery game is a win (in the present embodiment, for example, 4R). (Usually hit), the player has a dislike for the game machine even though the privilege game is given.

However, in the present embodiment, the special second starting port 58 is arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 always enters. Therefore, at least one second lottery game is held after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Therefore, in the first game round in the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the second lottery game is always executed. Then, in the high frequency support mode, since the electric accessory 66 is likely to be in the open state, the player hits the game ball to the right to continuously win the game ball in the normal second starting port 57. be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, only the second lottery game can be executed, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine. Further, by confirming that the second lottery game is executed as the first lottery game after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the player can perform the subsequent development in the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. You can enjoy the opening / closing execution mode (round game) while expecting, and you can further improve your interest in the game.

In addition, it has a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode, and when the second lottery game is won, the probability that the opening / closing execution mode, which is more advantageous for the player than when the first lottery game is won, is given. In the game machine in which the probability is high, a game machine has been conventionally proposed in which the degree of expectation of winning a winning lottery is first notified by a reserved symbol. However, in the conventional game machine, when the winning lottery is won in the low frequency support mode (when the winning lottery is won in the state where the second lottery game is not held), the high frequency support after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Since the second lottery game is not always executed in the first game in the mode, when a reserved symbol with high expectation is displayed, the winning lottery is won with the reserved symbol with high expectation. In consideration of the above, there is a problem that the launch is stopped for fear that the first lottery game will be executed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

Further, it has a high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode, and when the second lottery game is won, the probability that the opening / closing execution mode which is more advantageous for the player than when the first lottery game is won is given. Conventionally, in the low-frequency support mode, when a variable display is displayed on the symbol display device 80, a specified number of game balls are won in the first starting port 56 (first lottery). A gaming machine has also been proposed that notifies the expected degree of hit of the fluctuation display by holding a specified number of games). However, in such a conventional game machine, when the winning lottery is won in the low frequency support mode (when the winning lottery is won in the state where the second lottery game is not held), after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. Since the second lottery game is not always executed in the first game in the high frequency support mode, the launch is stopped for fear that the first lottery game will be executed after the open / close execution mode ends. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot fully enjoy the production mounted on the game machine.

However, as in the present embodiment, by ensuring that the second lottery game is executed in the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the player can perform the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode. The game can be continued without fear of the first lottery game being executed. That is, according to the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while fully enjoying the effect mounted on the game machine, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In other words, according to the present embodiment, various effects can be mounted on the game machine, and the player's motivation to play can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won by the variable winning device 59, the variable winning device start gate 61 (special second starting port) is set in the second region RT, which is the path through which the game ball flows down to the variable winning device 59. 58) is arranged. Therefore, it is necessary to change the method of launching the game ball between the case where the game ball is launched so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 and the case where the game ball is launched so as to win the variable winning device 59. There is no. That is, the act of firing the game ball so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 can be recognized by the player as a part of the act of causing the variable winning device 59 to win the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of firing the game ball so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 is troublesome. Further, since the special second starting port 58 is arranged in the second region RT, the game ball is also won in the special second starting port 58 by firing the game ball so as to win the variable winning device 59. there's a possibility that. For this reason, it is expected that a plurality of second lottery games are held after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the player is rushed to the sense of duty that the game ball must be launched immediately after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It is possible to suppress the player from being hit, and the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the open / close execution mode.

Further, the special second starting port 58 is configured so that the game ball can be won by the player hitting the right side, but it is difficult for the game ball to win the special second starting port 58 than the first starting port 56. The nail 51, the wind turbine 52, and the like are arranged so as to be. That is, in the normal state (in the low frequency support mode), the player can make the special second starting port 58 win the game ball by hitting right, but the first starting port 56 can win the game ball. If you shoot a game ball so that you can win a prize, you will have more chances to win a lottery, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the playability that is assumed in the normal state from being impaired by providing the special second starting port 58. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game value of the high frequency support mode from decreasing.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the variable winning device starting gate 61 (detection sensor 61a) may be arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 wins the special second starting port 58. Instead, it may be arranged so as to detect a winning game ball in the special second starting port 58. For example, the variable winning device start gate 61 may be provided in the passage through which the winning game ball is discharged to the special second starting port 58. That is, it may be provided in the passage where the game ball is discharged from the second region RT. That is, if at least one second lottery game is held after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the order in which the game balls enter (win) the variable winning device start gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 is appropriate. It can be changed. Further, the variable winning device start gate 61 may be shared with the special second start port 58. That is, the detection sensor 61a may be shared with the detection sensor 58a. In this way, by sharing the variable winning device starting gate 61 and the special second starting port 58, it is possible to reduce the number of parts.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, as the second starting port, the second starting port 57 may not be normally provided, but only the special second starting port 58 may be provided. In this case, for example, the special second starting port 58 is provided with an electric accessory 66, and the variable winning device starting gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 are arranged below the normal symbol starting gate 60 to perform the first implementation. The same effect as the morphology can be obtained. In such a configuration, in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 66 is opened so that the special second starting port 58 does not pass through the variable winning device starting gate 61. However, by ensuring that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 wins the special second starting port 58, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained. it can. Further, the configuration as shown in FIG. 41 can be appropriately applied to the following second and third embodiments.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable winning device start gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 may be arranged in a path through which the game balls that have not won the variable winning device 59 further flow down. That is, in the first embodiment, the variable winning device start gate 61 and the special second starting port 58 may be arranged below the variable winning device 59. Even as such a game machine, when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 and when the game ball is launched so as to win the variable winning device 59, the game ball is launched. Since it is not necessary to change the method, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of firing the game ball so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 is troublesome.

Further, the game ball may be arranged on a route different from the route until the variable winning device 59 is won, and may be arranged, for example, in the first region RS.

Further, the display of the opening image can be changed as appropriate, and as the opening image, for example, a moving image suggesting that the game ball should be launched so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 may be displayed. ..

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the method of guiding the game ball to the variable winning device start gate 61 is changed, and the other aspects are the same as those of the first embodiment. The explanation will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the passive distribution unit (distribution means) 220 is arranged above the variable winning device start gate 61 in the second region RT. That is, since the basic configuration (control) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, passive distribution is performed at a position where the game ball passes when the player hits the game ball to the right. The unit 220 is arranged.

Here, the configuration of the passive distribution unit 220 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the passive distribution unit 220.

As shown in FIG. 43, when the game ball reaches the passive distribution unit 220, the passive distribution unit 220 distributes the discharge destination of the game ball to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2, and passively distributes the game ball. A plurality of passive distribution devices 223 having a distribution member (distribution member) 221 and a branching wall portion 222 are provided. The guide area R1 is an area where the game ball can pass (enter) the variable winning device start gate 61, and the discharge area R2 is the area where the game ball passes (enters) the variable winning device start gate 61. This is a difficult area. In the present embodiment, the guide region R1 is the region on the upper side (outer rail 54 side) of the regions in which the passive distribution unit 220 is arranged in the second region RT, and the discharge region R2 is the second region RT. It is the area on the lower side (the symbol display device 80 side) of the area where the passive distribution unit 220 is arranged.

In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 221 has rod-shaped first to third projecting pieces 224 to 226 extending in one direction, and these first to third projecting pieces 224 to 226 are shaft portions 227. It has a substantially Y-shape in front view provided on the shaft portion 227 so as to be equidistantly spaced around the center. Then, by attaching the shaft portion 227 to the game board 43, the shaft portion 227 can be rotated around the shaft portion 227. Further, in the passive distribution member 221, a first accommodating portion (first passive portion) 228 capable of receiving a game ball is formed in a portion between the first projecting piece 224 and the second projecting piece 225, and a first A second accommodating portion (second passive portion) 229 capable of receiving a game ball is configured in a portion between the 1 protruding piece 224 and the 3rd protruding piece 226. Then, when the passive distribution member 221 receives the game ball at the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229, the passive distribution member 221 rotates around the shaft portion 227 due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the guide region R1 or Allocate (induce) to the discharge area R2. The rotation limit position of the passive distribution member 221 is defined by the branching wall portion 222 as described later.

The branch wall portion 222 is arranged directly below the shaft portion 227 and extends in the vertical direction in the front view. Further, in detail, the branch wall portion 222 is arranged between the second protruding piece 225 and the third protruding piece 226, and when the passive distribution member 221 rotates, the second protruding piece 225 or the third protruding piece 225 or the third It is arranged so that further rotation of the passive distribution member 221 is suppressed by contacting with the projecting piece 226. That is, the branching wall portion 222 functions as a stopper that defines the rotation limit position of the passive distribution member 221. In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 221 is arranged so that when the passive distribution member 221 is rotated, the second projecting piece 225 abuts on the branch wall portion 222 from the right side (outer rail 54 side) in front view, and the third projecting piece The 226 is arranged so as to come into contact with the branch wall portion 222 from the left side of the front view (the design display device 80 side). That is, when the passive distribution member 221 receives the game ball at the first accommodating portion 228, it rotates clockwise (second circumferential direction) to guide the game ball to the guide region R1 and guide the game ball to the second guide region R1. When it is received by the accommodating portion 229, it is arranged so as to rotate counterclockwise (first circumferential direction) and guide the game ball to the discharge region R2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the passive distribution member side magnet 224a is provided at the tip of the first protruding piece 224 opposite to the shaft portion 227, and the first protruding piece 224 is behind the game board 43. When the extension direction is the vertical direction in the front view, the base side magnet 230 is provided at a position corresponding to the passive distribution member side magnet 224a. In the present embodiment, the rotation regulating means is composed of the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230.

The passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230 are rod-shaped, respectively, and the polarity of the base side magnet 230 side of the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the passive distribution member side magnet 224a of the base side magnet 230 It is arranged so that the polarities on the sides repel each other (S poles or N poles).

As a result, the position where the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other) is the case where the first protruding piece 224 is located directly above the shaft portion 227. Since the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230 are arranged so as to have the same polarity (S poles or N poles), the first protruding piece 224 becomes the shaft portion 227 due to repulsion. It is possible to suppress the stop just above. That is, the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229 can be maintained in a state of being opened upward (a state of being rotated in the first circumferential direction or the second circumferential direction). Therefore, when the game ball reaches the passive distribution member 221, the game ball is alternately received by the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229, and is alternately discharged to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2.

The above is the configuration of the passive distribution device 223. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, five passive sorting devices 223 are continuously provided so as to be downwardly downward in the front view in the second region RT. Specifically, in each passive distribution device 223, when the game ball is distributed to the guide region R1 side by the passive distribution device 223 on the upstream side (previous stage) in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball is downstream. It is arranged so as to be received by either the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229 of the passive distribution member 221 in the passive distribution device 223 on the side (rear stage).

The variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged so that only the game balls distributed to the guide region R1 side by the passive distribution device 223 arranged on the most downstream side can pass through.

Next, the distribution operation of the game ball in the passive distribution unit 220 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the distribution operation of the two passive distribution devices 223 will be described, but the same distribution operation will be performed in the case of the five passive distribution devices 223.

As described above, the passive distribution member 221 is maintained in a state in which the first accommodating portion 228 or the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward by the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230. In FIG. 44A, the upstream passive distribution member 221 and the downstream passive distribution member 221 are shown in a state in which the first accommodating portion 228 is opened upward, respectively.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 228 of the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, the passive distribution member 221 rotates about the shaft portion 227. Then, by guiding the game ball to the guide region R1, the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 228 of the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side, the passive distribution member 221 rotates about the shaft portion 227. Then, by guiding the game ball to the guide area R1, the game ball is guided (distributed) to the variable winning device start gate 61. As a result, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 and wins a prize in the special second starting port 58 (not shown). After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1 side (variable winning device start gate 61), the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, in FIG. 44 (a), the passive distribution member 221 has the second accommodating portion 229. Since the game ball is stopped in a state of being opened upward, the game ball is received by the second accommodating portion 229, and the passive distribution member 221 is rotated to be guided to the discharge region R2 side. That is, the game ball flows down without being guided by the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the first accommodating portion 228 is opened upward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, the first accommodating portion 228 of the passive distribution member 221 is upward in FIG. 44 (d). Since it is stopped in the open state, the game ball is guided to the guide region R1 side in the same manner as in FIG. 44 (a).
After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side, in FIG. 44 (c), the passive distribution member 221 has the second accommodating portion 229. Since the game ball is stopped in a state of being opened upward, the game ball is received by the second accommodating portion 229, and the passive distribution member 221 is rotated to be guided to the discharge region R2 side. That is, the game ball flows down without passing through the variable winning device start gate 61. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (g), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side, the second accommodating portion 229 of the passive distribution member 221 is upward in FIG. 44 (e). Since the game is stopped in the open state, the game ball is guided to the discharge region R2 side as in FIG. 44 (d).
That is, the game ball flows down without being guided by the passive distribution member 221 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 221 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 229 is opened upward. That is, when the distribution operation shown in FIG. 44 (g) is executed, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 44 (a).

As described above, in the passive distribution unit 220 having the two passive distribution devices 223 shown in FIG. 44, four distribution paths (2 squared) are configured, and the four game balls have four game balls. One of the game balls passes through the variable winning device start gate 61. That is, when the five passive distribution devices 223 shown in FIG. 43 are provided, 32 distribution paths (2 to the 5th power) are configured, and one of the 32 game balls is used. Passes through the variable winning device start gate 61.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, by rotating the passive distribution member 221, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 when the rotation directions of the passive distribution member 221 are in a predetermined combination. That is, in the present embodiment, if 32 game balls are fired, one game ball always passes through the variable winning device start gate 61. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball does not pass through the variable winning device starting gate 61 for a long period of time, and a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is not started because the game ball does not pass through the variable winning device starting gate 61. Can be suppressed from occurring.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game balls can be distributed by the passive distribution member 221 common to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area R1 side or the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area R2 side is separately provided.

Further, a plurality of passive distribution members 221 (passive distribution device 223) are provided, and when a game ball is guided from the upstream passive distribution member 221 to the guide region R1 side, the downstream passive distribution member 221 is provided. The game ball is guided. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of passive distribution members 221 to be arranged (when the number of passive distribution members 221 is n, distribution can be easily performed. The number of routes is 2 to the nth power), and when the player hits the game ball to the right, the probability of the game ball passing through the variable winning device start gate 61 can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Further, since the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 always wins the special second starting port 58, the probability of the game ball passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 can be easily determined by the number of passive distribution members 221. The fact that it can be changed also means that the probability of a game ball winning a prize in the special second starting port 58 can be easily changed depending on the number of passive distribution members 221. Therefore, based on the probability of the game ball winning the first starting port 56 with respect to the total number of game balls launched when the player hits the game ball to the left, the total number of game balls launched when the player hits the game ball to the right. The probability of a game ball winning a prize in the special second starting port 58 can be easily changed. That is, the winning rate of the game ball between the first starting port 56 and the special second starting port 58 can be easily adjusted.

Further, since the passive distribution unit 220 has a rotation regulating means composed of the passive distribution member side magnet 224a and the base side magnet 230, the first accommodating unit 228 and the second accommodating unit 229 are played. After receiving the ball and rotating, rotation is suppressed before the next game ball is received. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
A modified example of the second embodiment will be described. For example, in the second embodiment, if the game ball is distributed to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2 by the passive distribution device 223, the method of arranging the passive distribution device 223 can be appropriately changed. For example, when a plurality of passive distribution devices 223 are provided, the plurality of passive distribution devices 223 may be arranged so as to be downward in the front view.

Further, in the second embodiment, it is provided with only one distribution member, a detection means for detecting a game ball distributed by the distribution member, and a distribution member driving unit for driving the distribution member. , The distribution direction of the distribution member may be defined by the distribution member driving unit according to the number of game balls distributed by the distribution member. For example, after detecting that 30 game balls have passed through the discharge area R2, one game ball R1 may be guided to the guide area R1. According to this, since only one distribution member needs to be provided, the game area can be widely used.

(Third Embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is provided with two variable winning device start gates 61 as compared with the first embodiment, and is the same as the first embodiment in other respects. Therefore, description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configuration of the game board 43 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board 43 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45, the game board 43 is provided with a variable winning device starting gate 68 in addition to the variable winning device starting gate 61. Specifically, the variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged in the second region RT, and the variable winning device starting gate 68 is arranged in the first region RS. In other words, the variable winning device start gate 61 is arranged so that the game ball can pass when the player hits the game ball to the right, and the variable winning device start gate 68 allows the player to hit the game ball to the left. It is arranged so that the game ball can pass through when it is played.

The variable winning device starting gate 61 and the variable winning device starting gate 68 have the same configuration, but in order to facilitate the distinction, the variable winning device starting gate 61 will be referred to as the first variable winning device starting gate in the following. (1st privilege game start ball entry part) 61, and the variable winning device start gate 68 will be described as the 2nd variable prize device start gate (2nd privilege game start ball entry part) 68.

Further, the game board 43 is provided with a detection sensor 68a (see FIG. 46) corresponding to the second variable winning device start gate 68. Then, when the game ball passes through the second variable winning device start gate 68, the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 68a, and the detection result is output to the main control device 91.

Further, the game board 43 is provided with nails 51, windmills 52, etc., and the nails 51, windmills 52, etc. are the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the first variable winning device start gate 61. Based on the probability of the game balls passing through the first variable winning device starting gate 61, the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is set to the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68. It is arranged so that the probability of passing game balls is higher. Although not particularly limited, the probability of a game ball passing through the first variable winning device starting gate 61 with respect to the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the first variable winning device starting gate 61 is 1 /. The probability of the game balls passing through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is about 1/5 with respect to the total number of game balls fired by the player toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68. ing.

In the vicinity of the second variable winning device start gate 68, a start port corresponding to a normal second start port 57 or a special second start port 58 is not arranged. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 flows down the first region RS as it is, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 57 or the special second starting opening 58.

The above is the configuration of the game board 43 in this embodiment. Next, the difference in control from the first embodiment due to the arrangement of the second variable winning device starting gate 68 will be described.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 are provided, the main MPU 112 is the detection sensor in step 901 in the special electric starting process (FIG. 25). Judgment is made based on the detection information of 61a and the detection sensor 68a. That is, in step 901, when the game ball passes through either the first variable winning device starting gate 61 or the second variable winning device starting gate 68, an affirmative determination is made. However, as described above, since the start ports corresponding to the normal second start port 57 and the special second start port 58 are not arranged in the vicinity of the second variable winning device start gate 68, the second variable winning device is provided. Even if the opening / closing execution mode is executed by passing through the start gate 68, it is difficult for the second lottery game to be held by the game ball passing through the second variable winning device start gate 68.

Further, the basic processing contents of the audio side MPU 153 and the display side MPU 162 are the same as those in the first embodiment. However, when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command (FIG. 37, S2005: YES), as shown in FIG. 47, the character "big hit !!", a corresponding background image (not shown), is displayed on the symbol display device 80. Advantages of firing the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61, along with an image suggesting that the game ball be fired (hit right) so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61. Explanation, an image suggesting that the game ball is fired (left-handed) so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68, and the game ball is fired so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68. Display an opening image with a description of the benefits of the case.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 through which the game ball passes more easily than the first variable winning device starting gate 61 are provided. Therefore, the player can execute the opening / closing execution mode at an early stage by firing the game ball so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68.

For example, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 66 is likely to be in the open state, and the game ball is usually easily won in the second starting port 57. Therefore, when the winning lottery is won, the second lottery game is already suspended. There may be. In such a case, since it is confirmed that the winning lottery of the second lottery game that has already been held is executed after the opening / closing execution mode, the player can play the game more than the first variable winning device start gate 61. By passing the game ball through the second variable winning device start gate 68, which is easy for the ball to pass through, the opening / closing execution mode can be executed at an early stage. However, when the winning lottery is won, if the first lottery game is held and the second lottery game is not held, the game is played at the first variable winning device start gate 61 as in the first embodiment. By allowing the opening / closing execution mode to be executed by passing the ball, the player can be made to execute the second lottery game after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

That is, according to the present embodiment, when the player wants to hold the second lottery game and execute the open / close execution mode depending on the situation, the player moves the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61. It may be fired, and if it is desired to execute the open / close execution mode at an early stage, the game ball may be fired so as to pass through the second variable winning device start gate 68. That is, the player can select the playability by himself / herself. Therefore, the range of the game can be widened, the player's interest in the game can be improved, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged in the second region RT, and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is arranged in the first region RS. Therefore, as compared with the case where the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 are arranged in the same area, the player fires toward the first variable winning device starting gate 61. The probability that the game ball launched by the player toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68 passes through the second variable winning device starting gate 68, rather than the probability that the game ball passes through the first variable winning device starting gate 61. The nearby nail 51, wind turbine 52, etc. can be easily set so that the value is higher.

(Modified example of the third embodiment)
A modified example of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 may not be arranged in different regions but may be arranged in the same region. For example, the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 may both be arranged in the second region RT. When the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 are arranged in this way, for example, the second region RT is set along the flow direction of the game ball by a nail 51, a windmill 52, or the like. It is divided into two or more areas, and the player can pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61 by firing a game ball aiming at one of the divided areas, and another divided area. By launching a game ball aiming at the area, the second variable winning device starting gate 68 may be passed through. However, even in such a configuration, the nail 51, the windmill 52, and the like make it easier for the game ball to pass through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 than the first variable winning device starting gate 61. It is preferable to do so. That is, in the third embodiment, the game ball can be hit so that the player passes through the first variable winning device starting gate 61 or the second variable winning device starting gate 68 (selectively flowing down the game ball). The probability that the game ball fired toward the second variable winning device starting gate 68 will pass through the second variable winning device starting gate 68 is toward the first variable winning device starting gate 61. If the probability that the launched game ball passes through the first variable winning device starting gate 61 is higher than the probability, the installation locations of the first variable winning device starting gate 61 and the second variable winning device starting gate 68 can be changed as appropriate. is there.

Further, in the third embodiment, as an opening image to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, a method of launching a game ball, which is likely to be advantageous to the player, is conspicuously displayed, or is likely to be advantageous to the player, depending on the situation. Only the way the player fires may be displayed. For example, when four second lottery games are already held when the winning lottery is won, even if the opening / closing execution mode is started by passing through the first variable winning device start gate 61, the second lottery is newly started. Since the lottery game is not held, the image of the suggestion of hitting the game ball to the left may be displayed prominently, or only the image of the suggestion of hitting the game ball to the left may be displayed. Further, for example, when the second lottery game is not held, the effect of passing the first variable winning device start gate 61 and executing the open / close execution mode can be sufficiently obtained, so that it is suggested to hit the game ball to the right. The image of the game may be displayed prominently, or only the image of the suggestion of hitting the game ball to the right may be displayed.

(Fourth Embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the arrangement location of the variable winning device starting gate 61 is changed with respect to the modified example of the first embodiment (see FIG. 41), and the other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment. , The description is omitted here.

First, the configuration of the game board 43 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, only the special second starting port 58 is provided as the second starting port, and usually the second starting port 57 is not provided. The special second starting port 58 is provided with an electric accessory (control member) 66.

The special second starting port 58 is located on the right side of the symbol display device 80 when viewed from the front, and is arranged below the normal symbol starting gate 60. In the present embodiment, since the game board 43 is provided with only one second starting port, the special second starting port 58 will be described below simply as the second starting port 58.

The variable winning device start gate 61 (detection sensor 61a) is not provided on the front side of the game board 43, and as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball winning the prize is discharged to the second starting port 58. It is provided in the passage 69.

The discharge passage 69 of the present embodiment has a spiral (meandering) shape at a portion between a portion communicating with the second starting port 58 and a portion where the variable winning device starting gate 61 is arranged. That is, the discharge passage 69 of the present embodiment has a second starting port as compared with the case where the portion communicating with the second starting port 57 and the portion between the variable winning device starting gate 61 are linear. It is configured so that the period until the game ball winning the 58 passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 is long. In other words, the discharge passage 69 of the present embodiment is configured such that the game ball winning the second starting port 58 passes through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Here, the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 30, S216) will be described. In the normal figure fluctuation start process (S1407) in the normal figure normal electric control process (FIG. 30, S216), as described above, the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 is performed using the hold information of the normal symbol, and high frequency support is provided. The mode has a higher probability of winning than the low frequency support mode. In this case, whether or not the high frequency support mode is set is basically determined by whether or not the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored, and if the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored, it is determined. Judged as high frequency support mode. However, even if the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored, if it is determined in step 504 of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 21) that the winning is won, the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 is determined. The judgment is the same as in the low frequency support mode from the time when the variable display corresponding to the winning win is confirmed until the opening / closing execution mode due to the winning is completed.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 50, the relationship between the display mode of the special symbol (variable display corresponding to the first lottery game or the second lottery game) and the lottery mode in the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 will be described. .. Note that FIG. 50 is a timing chart when the first lottery game or the second lottery game wins the lottery in the high frequency support mode (a state in which the time saving flag or the high probability mode flag is stored).

In FIG. 50, the display mode of the special symbol based on the first lottery game or the second lottery game is considered to be changing before the time point T1, the final stop is made at the time point T1, and the time point T1 to the time point T2 extends over a fixed time. Is confirmed (final stop display). In this case, the lottery mode in the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 is the lottery in the high frequency support mode before the time point T1 (before the fixed time starts), and after the time point T1 (after the fixed time starts). It will be a lottery in low frequency support mode. That is, after the time point T1, it becomes difficult to win the opening determination of the electric accessory 66, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 58.

Then, as described above, in the main MPU 112, when the first lottery game or the second lottery game wins the lottery, whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the fixed time has elapsed. Is executed (FIG. 25, S901). That is, the variable winning device start gate 61 is effective for passing the game ball from T2 onward when the fixed time has elapsed. That is, in the main MPU 112, whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 after it becomes difficult to win the opening determination of the electric accessory 66 and it becomes difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 58. Is executed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the discharge passage 69 has a spiral shape as described above, but in a state where the player continuously hits the game ball to the right, the time point Ts before the time point T1 and The game ball that has won a prize between the time point T1 and the time point T1 is configured to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the time point T2. At the time point Ts, at least one game ball starts second when the player continuously hits the game ball to the right in the high frequency support mode (a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased). The winning rate at which the electric accessory 66 is open and the electric combination until the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 44 wins (reaches) the second starting port 58 so as to win the mouth 58. It is set based on the opening time of the object 66 and the like. However, in the state in which the player continuously hits the game ball to the right in the present embodiment, the player controls the operation handle 31 so that the game ball continuously passes on the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80. The state in which the operation amount is maintained (the state in which the game ball is fired every 0.6 sec), that is, the operation handle 31 so that the player continuously enters the game ball into the second starting port 58. It means a state in which the operation amount is maintained, and does not include, for example, a state in which even if the player continuously hits the game ball to the right, the launch is stopped for each ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the player continuously hits the game ball to the right and the game ball wins the second starting port 58 at the time point T0 which is after the time point Ts and before the time point T1. The game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the time point T2 (for example, the time point T3). That is, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after T2 when it is determined by the main MPU 112 that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61.

The speed of the game ball that wins the second starting port 58 changes depending on the degree of collision with the nail 51 or the like before winning, and the speed at the time of winning is not constant. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the fastest speed assumed when the game ball wins the second starting port 58, all the game balls that have won the second starting port 58 after the time point Ts are after the time point T2. The shape of the discharge passage 69 is set so as to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device starting gate 61 is provided in the discharge passage 69 through which the winning game ball is discharged to the second starting port 58. The discharge passage 69 is configured such that the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 58 passes through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, when the winning lottery is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 without any awareness of the player, and the opening / closing execution mode is immediately performed. Can be started. As a result, the player can be given a sense of speed and exhilaration, and interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, the discharge passage 69 is configured so that the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 58 after the time point Ts passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after the time point T2. At the time point Ts, the player continuously hits the game ball to the right during the high frequency support mode, so that at least one game ball is moved to the second start port 58 between the time point Ts and the time point T1. It is the time when it is set to win a prize. For this reason, even if the player continuously hits the game ball to the right and wins the winning lottery, which makes it difficult for the electric accessory 66 to be in the open state, the player does not have to be aware of the game. The opening / closing execution mode can be started by passing the ball through the variable winning device start gate 61. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of running and exhilaration.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
A modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, in the fourth embodiment, the time point T2 is set as the time point in which the fixed time has elapsed in the variable display regarding the winning lottery, but the time point T2 can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case where after the fixed time has elapsed, an effect display such as "big hit !!" is displayed on the symbol display device 80, and then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61. The time point T2 may be set to the time when the fixed time and the time when the symbol display device 80 is displaying "big hit !!" or the like have elapsed. That is, in the fourth embodiment, whether or not the game ball that has won the second start port 58 after the time point Ts has passed through the variable winning device start gate 61 by the main MPU 112 due to the configuration of the discharge passage 69. As long as the variable winning device start gate 61 is passed after the time point T2 for determining whether or not, the period between the time point Ts and the time point T2 may include a period for other effects and the like.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the same game board 43 as in FIG. 5 may be used, the normal second starting port 57 and the like may be provided, and the electric accessory 66 may be provided in the normal second starting port 57. In this case, the discharge passage that normally communicates with the second start port 57 may be configured as the discharge passage 69 of the fourth embodiment, and the discharge passage 69 may be provided with the variable winning device start gate 61. That is, two variable winning device starting gates 61 may be provided. In addition, this configuration can be similarly applied to the following fifth embodiment.

According to this, since the two variable winning device start gates 61 are provided, for example, in the normal state (low probability mode, low frequency support mode, the player left-hands and the game ball is hit to the first start port 57. If the first lottery game wins the lottery in a state where the player is trying to win a prize, the player may pass through one of the variable winning device start gates 61 by hitting the game ball to the right. It is possible to increase the possibility that the open / close execution mode can be started at an early stage.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, an example has been described in which the discharge passage 69 has a spiral shape to prolong the period until the game ball winning the second starting port 58 reaches the variable winning device starting gate 61. However, the configuration of the discharge passage 69 can be changed as appropriate. For example, by making the discharge passage 69 straight and forming a roughened surface in the discharge passage 69 so that the speed of the game ball slows down, the game ball winning the second starting port 58 is a variable winning device start gate. The period until reaching 61 may be lengthened.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 112 detects that the game ball that has won the second starting port 58 has passed the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a lapse of a predetermined period from the time when the winning ball is won. The detection signal output from the sensor 61a may be controlled.
For example, the detection sensor 61a may output the detection result after a lapse of a predetermined period after passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61, or detects that the game ball has passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61. The signal may be continuously output for a predetermined period. According to this, no mechanical configuration is required, and it is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated.

(Fifth Embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Since the present embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment in that the method of setting the variable display time is changed with respect to the fourth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configurations of the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main ROM 113 is provided with an arrival period storage area 113k in addition to the various areas 113a to 113j. The arrival period storage area 113k is until the game ball that has won the second start port 58 reaches the variable winning device start gate 61 (until the game ball detected by the detection sensor 58a is detected by the detection sensor 61a). This is the area where the arrival period of is stored. As described above, the speed of the game ball that wins the second starting port 58 changes depending on the degree of collision with the nail 51 or the like before winning, and the speed at the time of winning is not constant. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the arrival period storage area 113k stores the longest possible arrival period until the game ball winning the second starting port 58 reaches the variable winning device start gate 61. ..

Further, in the variable display time table storage area 113d, as described above, in addition to the variable display time table for reach generation and the variable display time table for non-reach generation, the variable display time table for special reach generation is also stored. .. The variable display time table for special reach generation will be described later.

In addition to the various counter areas 114a to 114n, the main RAM 114 is provided with an arrival period timer counter area 114p. The arrival period timer counter area 114p is an area in which the arrival period timer counter in which the arrival period stored in the arrival period storage area 113k is set is stored.

Next, the process of acquiring the pending information executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information. This process is basically the same as the process for acquiring the hold information described with reference to FIG. 19, and is a process for setting the arrival period in the arrival period timer counter when the game ball wins the second starting port 58. This is a process in which (S411) is added.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of the present hold information, after the process of step 410 is executed, or after it is determined in step 407 that the hold number Nb stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area NB is 4. (S407: NO) reads the arrival period stored in the arrival period storage area 113k of the main ROM 113, and reads it into the arrival period timer counter stored in the arrival period timer counter area 114p of the main RAM 114. After setting (S411), the process of acquiring the pending information is terminated. The update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the arrival period timer counter set in step 411 is executed in the timer update process of step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17).

Subsequently, the process of grasping the variation display time in step 509 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21) executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a process of grasping the variable display time. This process is basically the same as the process of grasping the variable display time described above, but the variable display time is set with reference to the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB. This is the process.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, first, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won (S2301). In this process, in step 507 of the special electric fluctuation start process (FIG. 21), if a win is won, the corresponding flag is stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k, so that the various hit result flag storage area 114k is stored. It is determined by whether or not the flag is stored.

When it is determined that the winning lottery has been won (S2301: YES), the value of the number of reservations Nb stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area NB is read, and it is determined whether or not the number of reservations Nb is 1 or more. (S2302). That is, when the winning lottery is won, it is determined whether or not the second lottery game to be determined next is reserved. Then, when it is determined that the number of holds Nb is not 1 or more (S2302: NO), that is, when it is determined that the second lottery game is not held, the arrival period stored in the arrival period timer counter area 114p of the main RAM 114 The value of the period timer counter is read out, and it is determined whether or not the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0 or more (S2303). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball that has not passed through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after winning the second starting port 58.

Then, when it is determined that the winning lottery has not been won (S2301: NO), when it is determined that the number of holds Nb is 1 or more (S2302: YES), or when it is determined that the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0. If this is the case (S2303: YES), the normal grasping process is executed (S2304), and then the grasping process of the variable display time is terminated. In the normal grasping process, as described in the above-described variation display time grasping process, it is determined whether or not reach occurs, and based on the determination result, the reach non-occurrence variation display time table or the reach occurrence variation display Get the variable display time by referring to the time table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the arrival period timer counter is not 0 (S2303: NO), the special grasping process is executed (S2305), and then the grasping process of the fluctuation display time is terminated. In the special grasping process, the variation display time is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for special reach generation so that the variation display time is longer than the value of the arrival period timer counter acquired in step 2303. That is, the fact that the negative judgment is made in step 2303 means that although the winning lottery is won, the second lottery game is not held and the variable winning device start gate 61 is passed after winning the second starting port 58. It means that there is a game ball that has not been played. Therefore, the game is set as the variable display time before the variable display ends so that the game ball does not pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 and the open / close execution mode is started after the variable display is completed. The variable display time for the ball to pass through the variable winning device start gate 61 is acquired.
In other words, the variable display time is acquired so that the open / close execution mode is not started in the state where the second lottery game is not held.

The situation in which the number of holds Nb is 0 (S2302: NO) and the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0 (S2303: NO) is, for example, a situation in which the second start port 58 is sporadically performed in the low frequency support mode. There is a case where a game ball wins a prize. Further, for example, when switching from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the second lottery game held during the high frequency support mode is executed after switching to the low frequency support mode, and is held during the high frequency support mode. When the final second lottery game is executed, there is a case where the game ball that has finally won the second starting port 58 during the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the variable winning device starting gate 61.

Next, the process during special figure determination executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the processing during the determination of the special figure. This process is basically the same as the process during the determination of the special figure described with reference to FIG. 24, and is a process based on the value of the arrival period timer counter when it is determined that the winning lottery has been won (S803, S808). , S809) is added.

Specifically, when it is determined in step 802 that the lottery has been won (S802: YES), the value of the arrival period timer counter stored in the arrival period timer counter area 114p of the main RAM 114 is acquired, and the arrival period It is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter is 0 (S808). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball that passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 without the player launching a new game ball. Then, when it is determined that the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0 (S808: YES), that is, when it is determined that there is no game ball passing through the variable winning device start gate 61 at present, an opening command is output. Set as a target (S803).

As a result, when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command based on the opening command set as the output target in step 803 from the voice side MPU 152, as described with reference to FIG. 38 above, the character “big hit” and the corresponding background An image, an opening image suggesting that the player fires the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61 is displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0 (S808: NO), that is, it is determined that there is a game ball passing through the variable winning device start gate 61 even if the player does not newly launch the game ball. If so, a special opening command is set as the output target (S809).

Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the opening command based on the special opening command set as the output target in step 809 from the voice side MPU 152, as shown in FIG. 55, only the characters “big hit” and the corresponding background image are displayed. A special opening image is displayed, and an image suggesting that the player fires the game ball so as to pass through the first variable winning device start gate 61 is not displayed. That is, when the arrival period timer counter is not 0, it means that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after a predetermined period has elapsed (when the arrival period timer counter becomes 0). That is, if a negative determination is made in step 808, it means that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after a lapse of a predetermined period even if the player does not newly launch the game ball. Then, when the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61, an affirmative determination is made in step 901 of the special electric start processing (FIG. 25), and the open / close execution mode is executed.

For example, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball can continuously win the second start port 58 when the electric accessory 66 is opened, so that the player continuously enters the second start port 58. When the game ball is continuously fired so that the game ball wins, the arrival period timer counter is inevitably not 0 in many cases because the game ball continuously wins the second starting port 58. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step 808, nothing is intentionally displayed on the symbol display device 80 other than the characters "big hit" and the corresponding background image, and the game ball winning the second starting port 58 is variable. By allowing the opening / closing execution mode to be executed as it is by passing through the winning device start gate 61, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed and exhilaration (directing).

Further, as described above, the discharge passage 69 has a spiral shape, so that the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the game ball was won in the second starting port 58. ing. Therefore, even if the player stops launching the game ball when a highly expected effect (variable display) is displayed on the symbol display device 80, if the winning lottery is won, the final result is the first. 2 There is a possibility that the opening / closing execution mode is started by passing through the variable winning device starting gate 61 after a lapse of a predetermined period from the winning of the game ball in the starting port 58. Therefore, even if the player stops launching, the special opening image may be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and it is possible to give a feeling of running and exhilaration.

As described above, in the variation display time grasping process (FIG. 53), when it is determined that the hold number Nb of the second special symbol hold number storage area Nb is 0 (S2302: NO), the arrival period timer counter If it is determined that is not 0 (S2303: NO), a special grasping process is executed so that the fluctuation display time is longer than the value of the arrival period timer counter (S2305). However, a game ball may be newly won in the second starting port 58 before the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 54) after the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21) is completed. In this case, When the game ball wins in the second starting port 58, the reserved number Nb of the second special symbol reserved number storage area Nb is added by 1, and the arrival period is set in the arrival period timer counter (FIG. 52: S408, S411). That is, in the process of grasping the fluctuation display time (FIG. 53), the value of the arrival period timer counter was 0, but in the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 54), the value of the arrival period timer counter was not 0. Can be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, it is determined again whether or not the value of the arrival period timer counter is 0 even in the processing during the determination of the special figure, and the opening command based on the value of the arrival period timer counter is output. By setting (FIGS. 54, S803, S809), the display can be set according to the gaming state.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning lottery is won, the second lottery game is not held, and when the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0, the fluctuation display time is longer than the value of the arrival period timer counter. (Fig. 53, S2305). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being executed in a state where the second lottery game is not held.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
A modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the speed detection sensor for detecting the speed of the game ball winning in the second starting port 58 is provided, and the game ball starts the variable winning device based on the speed of the game ball winning in the second starting port 58. The arrival period until passing through the gate 61 may be calculated. According to this, a more accurate fluctuation display time can be set.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the fluctuation display time grasping process (FIG. 53), when it is determined that the winning lottery has been won when the normal grasping process (S2304) is executed (S2301: YES), the arrival period timer The fluctuation display time may be set so that the value of the counter is acquired and the fluctuation display ends immediately before the arrival period timer counter becomes 0 if the value of the arrival period timer counter is not 0. According to this, since the game ball passes through the variable winning device start gate 61 and the opening / closing execution mode is executed immediately after the variable display is completed, the player can impress the feeling of running and exhilaration.

(Other embodiments)
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Then, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. In addition, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied to an embodiment different from the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(A) Other application examples (1) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which "100" is set in the time reduction counter in step 1305 of the special electric power termination process (FIG. 29) has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, it may be "50" or "120".

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the large winning opening 59a is opened once or a plurality of times in a long-time mode, and then the large winning opening 59a is opened for a short time. The configuration may include a so-called rank-up (RU) hit that is opened once or a plurality of times in the embodiment. Further, although the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the support mode may be configured to have a winning result in which the low-probability support mode remains. For example, in the case of 4R probability variation, the support mode may remain in the low frequency support mode.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the gaming machine may not be provided with the high frequency support mode. Even for such a game machine, by making the second lottery game executed at the first game time when the open / close execution mode ends, the result is more advantageous when the second lottery game is won. Since it is likely to occur, the value of the open / close execution mode can be increased.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when the number of games played after the open / close execution mode reaches the end specified number of times (for example, 100 times), a mode with a limited number of times (so-called ST) shifts to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. ) May be installed as a game machine. In the case of such a game machine, there are some players who place importance on the feeling of running and exhilaration during ST. Therefore, especially in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the feeling of running and exhilaration is given to the player. By giving a feeling, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 59 is provided with a V winning area (used area) and a discharging area (unused area), and the game is played in the V winning area during the round game. It is also possible to shift to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends when the sphere passes.
In this case, for example, if the result of the first lottery game is won, the game ball can enter the V winning area with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%), and the result of the second lottery game is In the case of winning, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning area is higher (for example, 100%) than in the case of winning in the first lottery game. According to this, the probability of shifting to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode differs between the case where the first lottery game is won and the case where the second lottery game is won, and the result of the second lottery game is the winning. In this case, the result is far more advantageous to the player, so that the player can fully experience the effects of each of the above embodiments.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. The configuration may not be included in the winning numerical information in the probability mode.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration of granting the game ball to the variable winning device 59 or the like for winning the game ball is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out the game ball, and the function of storing the virtual game medium. In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved symbols (holding notice) related to the first and second lottery games are not displayed in the lower display area Dn of the symbol display device 80, but are provided separately from the symbol display device 80. The hold symbol may be displayed on the display screen of the display device, or the hold notice may be given by setting the movable decorative member in a predetermined notice mode, or the lamp ( The hold notice may be given by turning on the predetermined light emitting unit), or the hold notice may be given by the output of the sound from the speaker unit 34, and all or a part of each of the above embodiments may be combined. It may be configured in which a hold notice is given by.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. Further, the functions of the voice lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91, and the functions of both the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91. It may be configured as a new type. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 does not control the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 controls the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91. It may be configured to control the control device 92.

(10) Each of the above embodiments may be combined as appropriate. For example, the second embodiment may be combined with the third to fifth embodiments to include a passive distribution unit 220.

(11) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, etc.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.
In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

(B) Invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments The characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

(1) Feature A Group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a privileged gaming state such as a hit gaming state is entered. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.

Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (For example, see JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the player's interest in the game by increasing the value when the game shifts to the privilege game state. The feature A group solves this problem.

Features A1. The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of the predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second special information is acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the first special information and the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value larger than 1. When,
While executing the grant determination of whether or not the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the pass / fail information group in the grant information, the acquired information storage means Grant determination means (a function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the stored special information, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becomes the grant response result that the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game ( For example, a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for imparting an opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 59 in a long-time mode is provided.
When the first special information and the second special information are both stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means determines the grant of the second special information to the first special information. Execute before grant judgment,
Further, when the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the grant determination means is more likely to select the privilege game which is advantageous to the player than when the first special information is the grant correspondence result ( Function to execute the process of S505 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) In the game machine
The privilege game is started when it is determined that the predetermined start condition is satisfied by the privilege granting means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privileged game.

According to the feature A1, the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privilege game. Therefore, as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is executed. Therefore, in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the second special information that is likely to grant the privilege game advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result is obtained (winning the winning lottery) is always determined. By increasing the value of the privileged game, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry section". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature A2. The grant determination from the end of the privilege game until the predetermined end condition is satisfied is set as the first game mode (for example, high frequency support mode), and the grant determination when not in the first game mode In the second game mode (for example, low frequency support mode),
In the first game mode, the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first acquisition condition, and in the second game mode, the first acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second acquisition condition. The gaming machine according to feature A1 characterized by being present.

According to the feature A2, it has a first game mode and a second game mode in which the ease of satisfying the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition is different, and the range of games can be expanded.

Here, the player is provided with such a first game mode and a second game mode, and when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result. The probability that the privilege game is given is high, and in the first game mode, the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first acquisition condition (the second special information is easier to acquire). The problems (problems) that may occur in the above will be explained.

That is, in such a game machine, the player expects that the second special information is given and determined in the first game mode, and the second special information is given as a result of the granting, and the privilege game is given. I expect that. In other words, the player does not want the first special information to be granted and determined in the first game mode. Then, in the first game mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, the player is given a privilege game which is more disadvantageous than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result. Even though the privileged game is given, he has a dislike for the game machine.

However, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, the second special information is always determined to be granted in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed. Then, in the first game mode, the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, the second and subsequent grant determinations after the end of the privilege game are determined by the player continuously satisfying the second acquisition condition. , Only the second special information can be determined to be granted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine by determining that the first special information is given during the first game mode. In addition, by ensuring that the second special information is granted and determined as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the player can perform the subsequent development in the first game mode after the privilege game is completed. You can enjoy the privileged games while expecting them, and you can further improve your interest in the games.

In the second game mode, it is premised that the first special information is easier to obtain than the second special information, so that the player may be disgusted by the determination that the first special information is given. Not expected. Further, in the second game mode, since the first special information is more easily acquired than the second special information, it is possible to prevent the second special information from being excessively acquired, and the value of the first game mode is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Feature A3. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry section (first start port 56) and a second start ball entry section (usually a second start port 57, special) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area. 2nd starting port 58) and
It has a privilege game start ball entry unit (variable winning device start gate 61) on which the game ball launched from the launch means can enter.
The information acquisition means determines that the first acquisition condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the first start entry portion, acquires the first special information, and acquires the second start entry. When the game ball enters the ball portion, it is determined that the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the second special information is acquired.
The privilege game start ball entry section is provided in the privilege game start ball entry section provided so that the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section enters the privilege game start ball entry section. The game ball that has entered is provided so as to enter the second starting ball entering portion, or is shared with the second starting ball entering portion.
The privilege game is started as a predetermined start condition when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the game ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry portion. A1 Or the gaming machine described in A2.

According to the feature A3, the configuration of the feature A1 can be easily realized by adjusting the arrangement relationship between the second start ball entry portion and the privilege game start ball entry portion, and the structure can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Feature A4. It has a variable winning means (variable winning device 59) that is arranged in the game area and enables the winning of the game ball when the first special information or the second special information is the result of the grant correspondence. And
The privilege game start ball entry unit is a path until the game ball launched from the launching means flows down to the variable winning means, a path through which the game ball that has not entered the variable winning means flows down, or The gaming machine according to feature A3, which is provided in a passage for discharging the gaming ball provided in the path.

According to the feature A4, the variable winning means is entered when the game ball is launched so as to enter the privilege game start entry section and when the first special information or the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result. It is not necessary to change the method of firing the game ball in the case of firing the game ball as if it were a ball. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start entry section as a part of the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start ball entry portion is troublesome.

Feature A5. In the game area, a distribution means (passive distribution unit 220) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area enters the privilege game start entry unit. The gaming machine according to the feature A3 or A4, which is characterized by being provided with.

According to the feature A5, the game balls launched into the game area are distributed by the distribution means, and a part of them enters the privilege game start entry section. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball enters the privilege game start ball entry section.

Feature A6. The region provided with the sorting means (second region RT) has a guide region (R1) leading to the privilege game start entry portion and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the game machine has a distribution member (221) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game ball in the first circumferential direction and rotating the game ball to a predetermined angle.

According to the feature A6, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature A7. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature A6, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature A7, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the privilege game start entry section can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature A8. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 228) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive portion (second accommodating portion 229) that receives the game ball, and has.
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 230, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, which comprises a passive distribution member side magnet 224a).

According to the feature A8, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Feature A9. A display means (first result display unit 71a, first result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a 2 The result display unit 71b or the symbol display device 80) is provided.
When the grant determination means determines that the first special information or the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the privilege granting means determines the determination time of the pattern corresponding to the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, which comprises determining whether or not the start condition is satisfied after the lapse of time.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to a grant determination, such as feature A9. Further, in a game machine having such a display means, generally, when the special information is given as a response result, the privilege game is started immediately (automatically) after the fixed time elapses, but in the feature A9, the privilege is given. If it is determined by the means that the start condition is satisfied after the fixed time has elapsed, the privilege game is started. Therefore, the player can also start the privilege game at his / her own timing.

(2) Feature B Group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a privileged gaming state such as a hit gaming state is entered. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.

Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (For example, see JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the player's interest in the game by expanding the range of games. Feature B group solves this problem.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 56) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area, and
A second starting ball entry portion (usually a second starting port 57, a special second starting port 58) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area.
The first special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start ball entry section, and the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry section. Information acquisition means for acquiring information (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the first special information and the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value larger than 1. When,
While executing the grant determination of whether or not the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the pass / fail information group in the grant information, the acquired information storage means Grant determination means (a function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for sequentially executing the grant determination for the stored special information, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becomes the grant response result that the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game ( For example, a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for imparting an opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 59 in a long-time mode is provided.
When the first special information and the second special information are both stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means determines the grant of the second special information to the first special information. Execute before grant judgment,
Further, when the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the grant determination means is more likely to select the privilege game which is advantageous to the player than when the first special information is the grant correspondence result ( Function to execute the process of S505 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) In the game machine
The first privilege game start ball entry part (first variable prize device start gate 61) and the second privilege game start ball entry part (second variable prize device start gate 61) in which the game ball launched from the launch means can enter. 68)
The privilege game is started when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the game ball has entered the first privilege game start entry section or the second privilege game start entry section.
The first privilege game start ball entry section and the second privilege game start ball entry section are more likely to be launched when the player launches the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start ball entry section. It is provided so that the ball entry rate with respect to the total number of the launched game balls is higher than when the player launches the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start ball entry section.
The first privilege game start entry section is provided so that the game ball that has entered the second start entry section enters the first privilege game start entry section. The game ball that has entered the game start ball entry section is provided so as to enter the second start ball entry section, or is shared with the second start ball entry section. Game machine.

According to the feature B1, the first privilege game start ball entry part is provided so that the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry part enters the first privilege game start ball entry part. The game ball is provided so as to enter the second start ball entry section, or is shared with the second start ball entry section. For this reason, when the privilege game is started by the game ball entering the first privilege game start entry section, at least one second special information is stored after the privilege game is completed. In the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is executed. Therefore, in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the second special information that is likely to grant the privilege game advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result is obtained (winning the winning lottery) is always determined. By increasing the value of the privileged game, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the second privilege game start entry section, when the player launches the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start entry section, the player launches the first privilege game start entry section. It is provided so that the ball entry rate is higher than the case where the game ball is launched so as to enter the ball. That is, the second privilege game start ball entry section is provided so that the game ball can easily enter the ball than the first privilege game start ball entry section. Therefore, the player can start the privilege game at an early stage by firing the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start ball entry portion.

That is, according to the feature B1, when the player wants to store the second special information after the privilege game is completed, the player enters the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start entry section. It suffices to fire, and if it is desired to execute the privilege game at an early stage, the game ball may be fired so as to enter the second privilege game start entry section. That is, according to the feature B1, the playability can be selected by the player himself, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by expanding the range of the game. The case where the player wants to execute the privilege game at an early stage is, for example, a case where a predetermined number of second special information is already stored in the acquired information storage means.

Feature B2. The grant determination from the end of the privilege game until the predetermined end condition is satisfied is set as the first game mode (for example, high frequency support mode), and the grant determination when not in the first game mode In the second game mode (for example, low frequency support mode),
In the first game mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section, and in the second game mode, the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. The game machine according to feature B1, wherein the game ball is easier to enter than the second start ball entry portion.

According to the feature B2, it has a first game mode and a second game mode in which the ease of entering the first starting ball and the second starting ball is different, and the range of the game is widened. Can be done.

Here, the player is provided with such a first game mode and a second game mode, and when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result. The probability that the privilege game is given is high, and in the first game mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section (the second special information is acquired). The problems (problems) that may occur in the game machine (which is easy to do) will be explained.

That is, in such a game machine, a large number of players expect that the second special information is given and determined in the first game mode, and the second special information is given as a result of the granting, and the privilege game is performed. Expect to be granted. In other words, many players do not want the first special information to be given and determined in the first game mode. Then, in the first game mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, when the privilege game which is more disadvantageous than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result is given, a large number of players Despite being given a privileged game, he has a dislike for the game machine.

However, by providing the configuration of the feature B1, if the player starts the privilege game by inserting the game ball into the first privilege game start entry portion, the privilege game is started after the privilege game is completed. In the first grant determination, the second special information is always determined to be granted. Then, in the first game mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry portion, so that the player makes the second start ball entry for the second and subsequent grant determinations after the privilege game is completed. By continuously entering the game ball into the unit, only the second special information can be determined to be given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine by determining that the first special information is given during the first game mode. In addition, when the privilege game is granted by inserting the game ball into the first privilege game start entry section, the player is given the second special information as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed. It is possible to obtain a sense of security that the award is determined, and the award game can be enjoyed while expecting the subsequent development in the first game mode after the award game is completed, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the first game mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section, and when the second special information is given as the result, the second game ball has already been added. It is also assumed that special information is stored. In such a case, the player can execute the privilege game at an early stage by firing the game ball so as to enter the second privilege game start ball entry portion.

In the second game mode, it is a prerequisite that the game ball is easier to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, so that the first special information is given and determined. It is not expected that the player will be disgusted. Further, in the second game mode, since it is easier for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, the game ball excessively enters the second start ball entry section. Can be suppressed, and the value of the first game mode can be suppressed from decreasing.

Feature B3. The game area has a plurality of different areas (first area RS, second area RT) in which the game ball can be selectively flowed down by a launch operation of the launch means by the player.
The first privilege game start ball entry section is provided in one area of the game area or a passage through which the game ball is discharged from the one area, and the second privilege game start ball entry section is the first privilege game start ball entry section. 1 The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the gaming machine is provided in a different area from the area provided with the privileged game starting ball entry portion, or in a passage in which the game ball is discharged from the other area. ..

According to the feature B3, in order to prepare the first privilege game start entry part and the second privilege game start entry part in different areas, the second privilege game start entry part is played from the first privilege game start entry part. The arrangement structure of the nails and the like arranged in the game area can be easily set so that the ball can easily enter.

Feature B4. It has a variable winning means (variable winning device 59) that is arranged in the game area and enables the winning of the game ball when the first special information or the second special information is the result of the grant correspondence. And
The first privilege game start entry section is a path until the game ball launched from the launching means flows down to the variable winning means, and a path through which the game ball that has not entered the variable winning means flows down. , Or the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, which is provided in a passage for discharging the gaming ball provided in the path.

According to the feature B4, the player launches the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start ball entry section, and the case where the first special information or the second special information is given as a result. It is not necessary to change the method of launching the game ball in the case of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. That is, to make the player recognize the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start entry section as a part of the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the first privilege game start ball entry portion is troublesome.

Feature B5. In the game area, a distribution means (passive distribution unit) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area enters the first privilege game start entry unit. 220) The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature B5, the game balls launched in the game area are distributed by the distribution means, and a part of them enters the first privilege game start ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball enters the first privilege game start entry section.

Feature B6. The region provided with the sorting means (second region RT) has a guide region (R1) leading to the first privilege game start entry portion and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the game machine has a distribution member (221) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game in the first circumferential direction and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction.

According to the feature B6, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature B7. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature B6, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature B7, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the first privilege game start entry section can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature B8. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 228) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive portion (second accommodating portion 229) that receives the game ball, and has.
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 230, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, which has a passive distribution member side magnet 224a).

According to the feature B8, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Feature B9. A display means (first result display unit 71a, first result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a 2 The result display unit 71b or the symbol display device 80) is provided.
When the grant determination means determines that the first special information or the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the privilege granting means determines the determination time of the pattern corresponding to the grant correspondence result. After a lapse of time, any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first privilege game start entry section or the second privilege game start entry section. The game machine described in one.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a display means corresponding to a grant determination, such as feature B8. Further, in a game machine having such a display means, generally, when the special information is given as a response result, the privilege game is started immediately (automatically) after the fixed time elapses, but in the feature B9, the privilege is given. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first privilege game start entry section or the second privilege game start entry section after the fixed time has elapsed by the means, the privilege game is started. Therefore, the player can also start the privilege game at his / her own timing.

(3) Feature C group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, a privileged gaming state such as a hit gaming state is entered. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.

Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (For example, see JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the interest in the game by giving the player a feeling of running and exhilaration. The feature C group solves this problem.

Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 56) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area, and
At least one second start ball entry portion (usually a second start port 57, a special second start port 58) provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area.
The first special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start ball entry section, and the second special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry section. Information acquisition means for acquiring information (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the first special information and the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specified number defined as an integer value larger than 1. When,
While executing the grant determination of whether or not the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the pass / fail information group in the grant information, the acquired information storage means Grant determination means (a function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that sequentially executes the grant determination for the stored special information, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becomes the grant response result that the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponds to the hit / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game ( For example, a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for imparting an opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the variable winning device 59 in a long-time mode is provided.
When the first special information and the second special information are both stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means determines the grant of the second special information to the first special information. Execute before grant judgment,
Further, when the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the grant determination means is more likely to select the privilege game which is advantageous to the player than when the first special information is the grant correspondence result ( Function to execute the process of S505 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) In the game machine
It has a privilege game start ball entry unit (variable winning device start gate 61) into which the game ball launched from the launch means can enter.
The privilege game is started when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry section.
The privilege game start ball entry section enters the privilege game start ball entry section after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game ball entered the second start ball entry section by the privilege granting means. A game machine characterized in that it is determined to be a ball.

According to the feature C1, when the first special information or the second special information is given, the privilege game is given by the game ball entering the privilege game start entry section, so that the privilege game is given. There is a high probability that the second special information will be stored after the end of. Then, when the second special information is stored, as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result (winning the winning lottery) is obtained. The second special information, which is easy to be given, is always determined to be given. Therefore, when the second special information is stored, the value of the privileged game is improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the privilege game start ball entry section has entered the privilege game start ball entry section after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game ball entered the second start ball entry section by the privilege granting means. It is supposed to be judged. Therefore, when the special information is given as a result, the player may not be aware of it and the game ball may enter the privilege game start entry section with the second special information stored. In that case, the privilege game is started immediately. As a result, the player can be given a sense of speed and exhilaration, and interest in the game can be further improved.

Feature C2. The grant determination from the end of the privilege game until the predetermined end condition is satisfied is set as the first game mode (for example, high frequency support mode), and the grant determination when not in the first game mode In the second game mode (for example, low frequency support mode),
In the first game mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section, and in the second game mode, the game ball enters the first start ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the gaming ball is easier to enter than the second starting ball entry portion.

According to the feature C2, it has a first game mode and a second game mode in which the ease of entering the first starting ball and the second starting ball is different, and the range of the game is widened. Can be done.

Here, the player is provided with such a first game mode and a second game mode, and when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result. The probability that the privilege game is given is high, and in the first game mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section than the first start ball entry section (the second special information is acquired). The problems (problems) that may occur in the game machine (which is easy to do) will be explained.

That is, in such a game machine, a large number of players expect that the second special information is given and determined in the first game mode, and the second special information is given as a result of the granting, and the privilege game is performed. Expect to be granted. In other words, many players do not want the first special information to be given and determined in the first game mode. Then, in the first game mode, when the first special information becomes the grant correspondence result, when the privilege game which is more disadvantageous than when the second special information becomes the grant correspondence result is given, a large number of players Despite being given a privileged game, he has a dislike for the game machine.

However, by providing the configuration of feature C1, the probability that the second special information is stored after the privilege game is completed increases, and when the second special information is stored after the privilege game is completed, the privilege game is played. In the first grant determination after the end, the second special information is always determined to be granted. Then, in the first game mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry portion, so that the player makes the second start ball entry for the second and subsequent grant determinations after the privilege game is completed. By continuously entering the game ball into the unit, only the second special information can be determined to be given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the game machine by determining that the first special information is given during the first game mode. In addition, the player obtains a sense of security that the second special information is determined as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, so that the subsequent development in the first game mode after the privilege game is completed. You can enjoy the privileged games while expecting, and you can further improve your interest in the games.

In the second game mode, it is a prerequisite that the game ball is easier to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, so that the first special information is given and determined. It is not expected that the player will be disgusted. Further, in the second game mode, since it is easier for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry section than the second start ball entry section, the game ball excessively enters the second start ball entry section. Can be suppressed, and the value of the first game mode can be suppressed from decreasing.

Feature C3. In the second start ball entry section, the game ball is in an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start ball entry section, and the game ball enters the second start ball entry section from the open state. A control member (electric accessory 66) that can be switched between a closed state that becomes difficult and a closed state is provided.
In the first game mode, the control member is more likely to be in the open state than in the second game mode, and in the first game mode, the first special by the grant determination means. When it is determined that the information or the second special information is the result of the granting, and the predetermined condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the open state.
When the player performs a firing operation of the launching means so that the game ball is continuously entered into the second starting ball entering portion during the first game mode. It is determined by the privilege giving means that at least one of the game balls that entered before the control member became difficult to be in the open state entered the privilege game start entry portion after the lapse of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature C2, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature C3, when the player operates the launching means so as to continuously enter the game ball into the second start ball entry portion during the first game mode, the first special information or the second special information Is granted, and even if the control member becomes difficult to open, the privilege granting means determines that the game ball has entered the privilege game start entry section after the control member has become difficult to open. Will be done. Therefore, in the first game mode, when the player is operating the launching means so as to continuously enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion, the privilege game can be started immediately. It becomes more sexual and can give the player a sense of speed and exhilaration.

Feature C4. A display means (first result display unit 71a, first result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 1st result display unit 71a, 2 It has a result display unit 71b or a symbol display device 80).
In the first game mode, the control member is unlikely to be in the open state when the fixed time is started as the predetermined condition.
The privilege granting means determines whether or not the game ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry portion after the fixed time has elapsed.
When the player performs a firing operation of the launching means so that the game ball is continuously entered into the second starting ball entering portion during the first game mode. , It is determined by the privilege granting means that at least one of the game balls that entered before the confirmation time started entered the privilege game start entry portion after the confirmation time has elapsed. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that

As described above, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with display means. Further, in a game machine provided with a display means, the pattern is stopped and displayed for a fixed time after the variable display of the pattern is completed, and the control member is difficult to be opened when the fixed time is started. However, in the feature C4, the privilege granting means determines whether or not the game ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry section after the fixed time has elapsed, and the privilege game start ball entry section is in the first game mode. If the player is operating the launching means to continuously enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering portion, the privilege granting means enters the ball before the fixed time is started. It is determined that at least one of the played game balls has entered the privilege game start ball entry section after the fixed time has elapsed. Therefore, the player decides the game ball without any consciousness by performing the launch operation of the launching means so that the game ball is continuously entered into the second start ball entry portion during the first game mode. It is possible to have the privilege granting means determine that the ball has entered the privilege game start entry section after the lapse of time.
That is, the player can start the privilege game immediately after the fixed time has elapsed.
Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of running and exhilaration.

Feature C5. Based on the grant determination of the grant determination means, the display mode determining means (a function of executing the process of S509 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for setting the period of the variation display is provided.
When the first special information or the second special information is determined by the grant determination means to be the result of the grant correspondence, the display mode determining means stores the second special information in the storage means. If it is determined that there is no ball, and it is determined that there is a game ball that has not entered the privilege game start ball entry section and has not entered the privilege game start ball entry section. The description in any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the period of the variation display is set so that the variation display ends after the game ball enters the privilege game start entry section. Game machine.

According to the feature C5, when the first special information or the second special information is given and the response result is obtained, if the second special information is not stored, the special game of the player who has entered the second starting ball entry section. When it is determined that there is a game ball that has not entered the starting ball entry section, the variation display ends after the game ball enters the privilege game starting ball entry section. Therefore, when the second special information is not stored, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the privilege game start entry section and the privilege game being given.

Feature C6. The privilege game start ball entry section is provided in a passage (69) for discharging the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section, and the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section is the predetermined one. The ball enters after the period has passed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the passage has a spiral shape.

According to the feature C6, as compared with the case where the passage for discharging the game ball is a straight line, the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section with a simple configuration enters the privilege game start entry section. You can lengthen the period until it is determined that you have done so. Further, in the case of having a configuration like the feature C4, by changing the shape, the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry portion according to the fixed time (model of the game machine) is a privilege game start ball. You can easily change the period until you enter the club.

Feature C7. The privilege game start ball entry unit receives a detection signal determined to have entered the privilege game start ball entry unit by the privilege granting means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after entering the second start ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that a detection means (detection sensor 61a) for outputting is provided.

According to the feature C7, the period until it is determined by the privilege giving means that the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section has entered the privilege game start entry section is lengthened by the detection signal. .. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above-mentioned feature C6 while suppressing the mechanical structure from becoming complicated.

Feature C8. It has a variable winning means (variable winning device 59) that is arranged in the game area and enables the winning of the game ball when the first special information or the second special information is the result of the grant correspondence. And
The second starting ball entry portion is provided on a path until the game ball launched from the launching means flows down to the variable winning means, or the game ball that did not enter the variable winning means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, which is provided in the path through which the squirrel flows down.

According to the feature C8, the case where the game ball is launched so as to enter the privilege game start ball entry section (the second start ball entry section) and the case where the first special information or the second special information is given are the result of granting. In this case, it is not necessary to change the method of launching the game ball in the case of launching the game ball so that the game ball is inserted into the variable winning means. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start entry section as a part of the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the variable winning means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the act of launching the game ball so as to enter the privilege game start ball entry portion is troublesome.

Feature C9. In the game area, a distribution means (passive distribution unit) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area enters the first privilege game start entry unit. 220) The gaming machine according to any one of C1 and C8, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature C9, the game ball launched in the game area is distributed by the distribution means, and a part of the game ball enters the first privilege game start ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball enters the first privilege game start entry section.

Feature C10. The region provided with the sorting means (second region RT) has a guide region (R1) leading to the first privilege game start entry portion and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the game machine has a distribution member (221) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game in the first circumferential direction and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction.

According to the feature C10, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature C11. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature C10, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature C11, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the first privilege game start entry section can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature C12. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 228) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive portion (second accommodating portion 229) that receives the game ball, and has.
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 230, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature C10 or C11, which has a passive distribution member side magnet 224a).

According to the feature C12, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, rotation without receiving the game ball is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Further, the basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.
<Others>
Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to shift to a privileged gaming state such as a winning gaming state when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery will be held. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery, and the stop display according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. (Stop result) is displayed, which is a display effect for one game. Then, when the lottery result is to win the transition to the privilege game state, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area can be opened and closed. It is executed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.
Further, in such a game machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display device is performing a variable display of the pattern, a predetermined number of information to be used for the winning lottery (for example, for example). Some of them are stored (holding storage) up to 4). Then, when the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variable display of the pattern is completed, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to shift to the privilege game state again using the stored information, and the next pattern is stored. Fluctuation display of is started.
Further, in such a game machine, different start ports, a first start port and a second start port, are provided in the game area, and the game shifts to the privilege game state when the game ball enters the first start port. In some cases, it is more likely that the player will be more likely to get an advantageous result, such as a larger number of game balls being paid out, when the game shifts to the privileged game state when the game ball enters the second starting port. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853).
By the way, in such a game machine, it is desired to raise the player's interest in the game by increasing the value when the game shifts to the privilege game state.
In view of the above points, the present technical idea aims to provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily increasing a player's interest in a game.
<Means>
The gaming machine of the technical idea 1 for achieving the above object acquires the first special information based on the establishment of the predetermined first acquisition condition, and is predetermined different from the first acquisition condition. The information acquisition means for acquiring the second special information based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition, the first special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the second special information are each set to an integer value larger than 1. The grant determination of whether or not the acquired information storage means that stores up to a specified number, the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second special information correspond to the validity information group in the grant information. Is executed, and the grant determination means for sequentially executing the grant determination for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means are the first special information to be determined or the first. 2 It is assumed that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group. When the result of the grant correspondence is obtained, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege game to the player is provided, and the grant determination means includes the first special information and the acquisition information storage means. When the second special information is stored together, the second special information grant determination is executed before the first special information grant determination, and the grant determination means is provided with the second special information. In the case of a result, in a gaming machine in which it is easier for the player to select a privilege game that is advantageous to the player than in the case where the first special information is the result of granting, the privilege game is a start condition predetermined by the privilege granting means. Is started when it is determined that the above is established, and the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privilege game.
<Effect>
According to this, when the privilege game is given, the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privilege game. Therefore, as the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group is executed. Therefore, in the first grant determination after the privilege game is completed, the second special information that is likely to grant the privilege game advantageous to the player when the grant correspondence result is obtained (winning the winning lottery) is always determined. By increasing the value of the privileged game, the player's interest in the game can be increased.
In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry section". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

10 ... pachinko machine (game machine), 26 ... first frame button 44 ... game ball firing mechanism, 56 ... first start hole, 5 8 ... second start hole, 61 ... variable winning device starting gates, passages ... 69, 80 ... symbol display device, 91 ... main control device, 92 ... voice lamp control device, 93 ... display control device, 112
... MPU (main side MPU), 113 ... ROM (main side ROM), 114 ... RAM (main side RAM)
), 152 ... MPU (voice side MPU), 153 ... ROM (voice side ROM), 154 ... RA
M (audio side RAM), 162 ... MPU (display side MPU), 163 ... program ROM, 1
64 ... Work RAM, 165 ... VDP.

Claims (3)

The first special information is acquired based on the establishment of the predetermined first acquisition condition, and the second is based on the establishment of the predetermined second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition.
Information acquisition means to acquire special information and
The first special information and the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means are each 1
Acquired information storage means for storing up to a specified number of larger integer values,
While executing the grant determination of whether or not the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the pass / fail information group in the grant information, the acquired information storage means Grant determination means for sequentially executing the grant determination for the stored special information, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the first special information to be determined or the second special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group, the player is given a privilege game. With a means of granting benefits,
When the first special information and the second special information are both stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means determines the grant of the second special information to the first special information. Execute before grant judgment,
Further, when the second special information is the grant correspondence result, the grant determination means makes it easier for the player to select the privilege game which is advantageous to the player than when the first special information is the grant correspondence result. In the game machine
The privilege game is started when it is determined that the predetermined start condition is satisfied by the privilege granting means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means by the end of the privileged game. When the grant determination from the end of the privilege game to the establishment of the predetermined end condition is set as the first game mode, and the grant determination when not in the first game mode is set as the second game mode.
In the first game mode, the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first acquisition condition, and in the second game mode, the first acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second acquisition condition. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by being A launching means that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the launch operation by the player,
A first start ball entry section and a second start ball entry section provided in the game area and capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
It has a privilege game start ball entry section where the game ball launched from the launch means can enter.
The information acquisition means determines that the first acquisition condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the first start entry portion, acquires the first special information, and acquires the second start entry. When the game ball enters the ball portion, it is determined that the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the second special information is acquired.
The privilege game start ball entry section is provided in the privilege game start ball entry section provided so that the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section enters the privilege game start ball entry section. The game ball that has entered is provided so as to enter the second starting ball entering portion, or is shared with the second starting ball entering portion.
The claim is characterized in that, as the predetermined start condition, the privilege game is started when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the game ball has entered the privilege game start ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

Images